2017 Alfa Romeo Giulia Owners Manual

2 0 1 7

20

17

GIU

LIA

GIULIAThird Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

OW N E R ’ S M A N U A L©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark ofFCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.

17GA-126-AC

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCAUS LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCACanada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOLDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes ofaccidents.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with bloodalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you aredrinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes areslower, and your judgment is impaired when youhave been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation offeatures and equipment that are either standard or op-tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include adescription of features and equipment that are no longeravailable or were not ordered on this vehicle. Pleasedisregard any features and equipment described in thismanual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in designand specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-ments to its products without imposing any obligationupon itself to install them on products previously manu-factured.

Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC

DEAR CUSTOMERDear Customer,We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possibleway. Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle.Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the bestperformance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo.You are advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to becomefamiliar with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehiclebehavior on different road surfaces.This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving,care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time.In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers.The New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by thepeople at Alfa Romeo.For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact the Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA(1-844-253-2872)

READ THIS CAREFULLY

RefuelingDo not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vitalcomponents of the supply system.For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine

Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, andthen push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or otherflammable material: fire hazard.

Respecting The Environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect theenvironment.

Electrical Accessories

If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorizeddealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing

Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance andsafety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.

VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONSAccessories Purchased By The Owner

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupantscould even be fatally injured.

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system,etc.) or accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer.Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needsto be integrated with a more powerful battery.

Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce theventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothingobstructs the pedals (mats, etc.).FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended byFCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.

Installing Electrical/Electronic DevicesFCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, incompliance with manufacturer's specifications.Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have beeninstalled. This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it.FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended byFCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.

Radio Transmitters And Mobile PhonesRadio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless aseparate antenna is mounted externally.Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use ofapproved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer.

Caution!

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems tomalfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.

If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of thePassive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALOperating Instructions

Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from theperspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such inthe text as appropriate.The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actualarrangement of your vehicle.To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual.Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key forgetting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each currentchapter at the side of each even page.

Warnings And Cautions

While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect useof the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries.There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:Personal Safety:Vehicle Safety:Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional contents, equipment meant for specificMarkets or particular models are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the informationrelated to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specificrequest of options at the time of purchase, will be identified by the indicator: — if equipped.The data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA USLLC aims for constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to makechanges to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.For further information, contact your authorized dealer.

SymbolsSome car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component.It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

READ THE OWNERHANDBOOK

DO NOT TOUCH WITHHANDS

IT CAN STARTAUTOMATICALLY ALSOWITH ENGINE OFF

PROTECT YOUR EYESDO NOT OPEN THE CAPWHEN THE ENGINE ISHOT

DO NOT OPEN: HIGHPRESSURE GAS

KEEP CHILDREN AT ADISTANCE

BURSTINGMOVING PARTS KEEPPARTS OF YOUR BODYAND CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACHFLAMES

CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

03016S0001EM

Front View

1 — Headlights 4 — Doors2 — Tires And Wheels 5 — Engine Compartment3 — Power Windows 6 — Windshield

9

REAR VIEW

03026S0001EM

Rear View

1 — Tail Lights2 — Trunk Lid

10

INSTRUMENT PANEL

03036S0050EM

Instrument Panel

1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Control System2 — Air Vents 6 — Steering Wheel 10 — Glove Compartment3 — Multifunction Stalk 7 — Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 — Passenger-Side Air Bag4 — Controls On Steering Wheel 8 — Information And Entertainment

System

11

VEHICLE INTERIOR

03046S0001EM

Vehicle Interior

1 — Driver Seat 4 — Hazard Warning Lights2 — Power Windows/Power Mirrors Controls 5 — Alfa DNA System3 — Gear Selector/Paddle Shifter

12

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find importantinformation to help you become familiarwith the features needed to operateyour vehicle, and how they function.

KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . .16ENGINE IMMOBILIZER . . . . . . . .18SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . .30STEERING WHEEL. . . . . . . . . . . .31MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . .34INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . .37WINDSHIELD WIPERS . . . . . . . . .39CLIMATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . .42POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . .49POWER SUNROOF —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51TRUNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . .54ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTIONSYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS . . . . . . .59

13

KEYSKey Fob

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignitionsystem. This system includes a key foband a keyless push button ignition.The Remote Keyless Entry key foballows you to lock or unlock the doorsand trunk or activate the Panic Alarmfrom distances. The key fob does notneed to be pointed at the vehicle toactivate the system.

PANIC FunctionThe key fob contains a PANIC button.Should you ever feel threatened, pushthis button and the vehicle securityalarm will sound.To activate the PANIC function, pushand hold the PANIC button for at leastone second. When the panic alarm isactive, the headlights turn on,the turn signals flash, the horn honks

intermittently, and all interior adjustablelights turn on. The panic alarm willremain active for three minutes, andcan be deactivated:

By pushing the PANIC button again.

Automatically if the vehicle speedexceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).In both cases, the panic alarm isimmediately deactivated.

Warning!

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift theautomatic transmission into PARK, applythe parking brake, turn the engine OFF,remove the key fob from the vehicle andlock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move thevehicle.

Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heatbuild-up may cause serious injury or death.

Operation

Door And Trunk Lid UnlockBriefly pushing the unlock button on thekey fob will unlock the doors and trunklid, turn on the interior lights, and flashthe turn signals once (if activated fromthe Information and EntertainmentSystem).Push and release the unlock button onthe key fob once to unlock the driverside front door or twice within onesecond to unlock all doors and thetrunk lid.The current unlock setting can bechanged through the Information andEntertainment System menu, so thatthe system unlocks:

All doors unlock on the first push ofthe key fob unlock button.

Unlock the driver door on the firstpush of the key fob unlock button.Flashing of the turn signals uponlocking/unlocking the doors andactivation of the courtesy light uponunlocking the doors can be activated ordeactivated through the Informationand Entertainment System. For furtherinformation, refer to the Information andEntertainment System Owner’s ManualSupplement.The doors can also be unlocked byusing the emergency key, located insidethe key fob.

04016S0001EM

Key Fob

14

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Door And Trunk Lid LockBriefly pushing the lock button on thekey fob will lock the doors and trunk lid,turn off the interior lights, and flash theturn signals (if activated in theInformation and Entertainment System).If one or more doors are open, thesedoors will also lock, and this is indicatedby a rapid flashing of the turn signals.The doors prepare for locking, whichbecomes active from the moment theyare closed. The doors will unlock againonly if the key fob is detected inside thepassenger compartment.The doors can be locked by using theemergency key in the driver’s side doorlock.Trunk Lid OpeningRapidly push the trunk lid key fobbutton twice to open the trunk lid.The turn signals will flash to indicatethat the trunk lid has been opened.Remote StartThe remote start button on the key fobenables engine starting (push thebutton twice to start the engine).Car FinderPush the lock or unlock button toremotely and temporarily turn on theturn signals and headlights.

This is useful for finding the vehicleeasily in a crowded area like a parkinggarage, for example.Pushing the lock or unlock button againwill restart the lights turn on timer (if theparking lights functions were alreadyactive, it will remain active).This function is available only if thedoors are closed.

Replacing TheElectronic Key FobBattery

To replace the battery, proceed asfollows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inwardand extract the cover pulling downwards.

2. Remove the emergency key from itshousing.

3. Remove the battery plug by rotatingit counter clockwise.

04016S0002EM

Key Fob Cover Removal

04016S0003EM

Removing Emergency Key

04016S0004EM

Removing Battery Plug

15

4. Remove the battery from its slot andreplace it with a new one of the sametype.

Proceed in reverse order to reassemblethe key.

Caution!

The battery replacement operation must bedone with care, in order not to damage theelectronic key.

Request For AdditionalKeys

The system can recognize up to eightkey fobs with remote control.To guarantee that the engine starts andthe vehicle operates correctly, use onlyelectronic key fobs specifically codedfor the vehicle’s electronics.

If an electronic key fob is coded for avehicle, it cannot be used on any othervehicle.Duplicating KeysIf you need a replacement key fob, goto an authorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statementapplies to all Radio Frequency (RF)devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.Note: Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.

IGNITION SYSTEMOperation

To activate the keyless ignition, the keyfob must be inside the passengercompartment.

The keyless ignition has the followingmodes:

STOP: engine off, steering locked.Some electrical devices (e.g. centraldoor locking system, alarm, etc.) arestill available.

ON: all electrical devices areavailable. This state can be entered bypushing the ignition button once,without pressing the brake pedal.

AVV: engine starting. This state canbe entered by pushing the ignitionbutton once while pressing the brakepedal.

04016S0005EM

Battery Location

04026S0001EM

Keyless Ignition START/STOPButton

16

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Note:

With the keyless ignition in the ONposition: if 30 minutes pass with thegear selector in P (Park) and theengine stopped, the keyless ignitionwill automatically reset to the STOPposition.

With the engine started, it ispossible to remove the key fob fromthe vehicle. The engine will remainrunning and the instrument cluster willindicate the absence of the key fobwhen the door is closed.

For more information on the enginestart-up, refer to "Starting The Engine"in "Starting And Operating."

Warning!

Never use the PARK position as asubstitute for the parking brake. Alwaysapply the parking brake fully when parkedto guard against vehicle movement andpossible injury or damage.

When exiting the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the transmission gearselector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignition inthe AVV or ON/RUN mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls,or move the vehicle.

Be sure the parking brake is fullydisengaged before driving; failure to do socan lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the parking brakewhen leaving your vehicle, or it may rolland cause damage or injury. Also becertain to leave the transmission in PARK.Failure to do so may allow the vehicle toroll and cause damage or injury.

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake engaged, or repeated use of theparking brake to slow the vehicle maycause serious damage to the brakesystem.

Caution!

If the Brake System Warning Light remainson with the parking brake released, a brakesystem malfunction is indicated. Have thebrake system serviced by an authorizeddealer immediately.

Starting With ADischarged Key FobBattery

If the key fob battery is discharged,proceed as follows to start the vehicle:

1. Lift the front armrest.

2. Lay the key fob on the key foboutline found on the floor of the armrestcompartment while pushing theSTART/STOP button to start theignition.

04026S0002EM

Key Fob Placement Location

17

General Information

The following regulatory statementapplies to all Radio Frequency (RF)devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



ENGINEIMMOBILIZEREngine ImmobilizerOperation

The Engine Immobilizer systemprevents unauthorized use of thevehicle by disabling engine starting.The system does not need to beenabled or activated. Operation of theimmobilizer is automatic whether thevehicle's doors are locked or unlocked.When the ignition is set to ON, theEngine Immobilizer system identifies thecode transmitted by the key. If the codeis recognized as valid, the EngineImmobilizer system enables enginestarting.When the ignition is brought back toSTOP, the Engine Immobilizer systemdeactivates the control unit controllingthe engine, disabling engine starting.For the correct engine startingprocedures, refer to “Starting TheEngine” in “Starting And Operating.”Irregular OperationIf the key code is not recognized duringstarting, the Engine ImmobilizerFailure/Break-in Attempt icon isdisplayed on the instrument panel(refer to "Warning Lights AndMessages" in "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel"). This condition leadsto the engine turning off after twoseconds.

In this case, switch the ignition to STOPand then to ON; if it is still blocked, trywith the other keys provided. If it is stillnot possible to start the engine, contactan authorized dealer.If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is displayedwhile driving, this means that thesystem is running a self-diagnosis(e.g. due to a voltage drop). If thedisplay persists, contact an authorizeddealer.

Note:

Do not tamper with the EngineImmobilizer system. Any modificationsor alterations could cause theprotection function to be deactivated.

The Engine Immobilizer system isnot compatible with certain aftermarketremote starting systems. The use ofthese devices could cause problemswhen starting, as well as thedeactivation of the protection function.

All keys provided with the vehiclehave been programmed in accordancewith the electronics on the vehicleitself.

Each key has its own code whichmust be stored by the system's controlunit. Contact an authorized dealer tohave new keys (up to eight) stored witha code.

18

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

SECURITY ALARMSYSTEM — IFEQUIPPEDAlarm Activation

While armed, the alarm will sound in thefollowing scenarios:

Opening of doors/hood/trunk lid(perimeter protection)

Operation of ignition with a keywhich is not validated

Cutting of the battery cables

Movement inside the passengercompartment (volumetric protection —if equipped)

Unexpected lifting/tilting of thevehicle (anti-lift protection — ifequipped)Activation of the alarm triggers theacoustic warning and the turn signals.Note: The alarm system is activated bythe Engine Immobilizer system, which isautomatically activated when you getout of the vehicle with the key fob andlock the doors.

To Arm The Alarm

With the doors, hood, and trunk lidclosed and the keyless ignition systemplaced in the STOP position, push andrelease the lock button on the key fob.The alarm can also be armed bypushing the Passive Entry door handle

button, located on the exterior doorhandle. For further information, refer to"Passive Entry" in "Doors.”

When the alarm is armed, the warninglights on the panels of the interior frontdoor handles will flash.

The activation of the alarm is precededby a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault isdetected, the system emits a furtheracoustic signal.

If a second acoustic signal is emittedafter the alarm is already armed, waitabout four seconds and disarm thealarm by pushing the unlock button.Verify that the doors, hood, and trunklid are closed correctly and then rearmthe system by pushing the lock buttonon the key fob.If the alarm emits an acoustic signaleven when the doors, hood, and trunklid are correctly closed, a fault hasoccurred in system operation. In thiscase, contact an authorized dealer.

To Disarm The Alarm

Push the unlock button to disarm thealarm. While disarming, the followingoperations are performed:

Two brief flashes of the turn signals(if programmed)

Two brief acoustic signals(if programmed)

Doors are unlockedThe alarm can also be disarmed usingthe Passive Entry System, by graspingone of the Passive Entry front doorhandles with a valid key fob in hand tounlock. For further information refer to"Passive Entry" in "Doors.”

04056S0003EM

Passive Entry Door Handle Button

04046S0001EM

Lock/Unlock Buttons

19

Note: The alarm does not disarm whenthe doors are unlocked by inserting theblade of the emergency key, foundinside the key fob, into the door handlelock cylinder.

Volumetric/Anti-LiftProtection — If Equipped

To ensure the correct operation of theVolumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system,completely close the side windows.To disable the function, push theVolumetric/Anti-Lift Protection buttonbefore activating the alarm.When the function is disabled,this is indicated by the light on theVolumetric/Anti-Lift Protection buttonflashing for several seconds.

Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-LiftProtection must be repeated each timethe instrument panel is switched off.

To Disarm The AlarmUsing Passive Entry

To completely deactivate the alarm(e.g. during a long period of vehicleinactivity), insert the blade of theemergency key, found inside the keyfob, into the door handle lock cylinderand turn the emergency key to the right(clockwise) to lock the door(s).

DOORSLocking And UnlockingDoors From The Inside

If all doors are closed properly, they willautomatically lock once the vehicle hasexceeded approximately 12 mph(20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function active).Push the interior lock button on thedriver or passenger side door panel trimto lock the doors.With doors locked, push the unlockbutton on the interior trim panel tounlock the doors.Note: The key fob may not be found if itis located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; thesedevices may block the key fob’s wirelesssignal.

04056S0003EM

Passive Entry Door Handle Button04046S0002EM

Volumetric/Anti-LiftProtection Button

04056S0001EM

Door Lock And Unlock SwitchPanel

20

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Warning!


For personal security and safety in theevent of a collision, lock the vehicle doorsas you drive as well as when you park andleave the vehicle.

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift theautomatic transmission into PARK, applythe parking brake, turn the engine OFF,remove the key fob from the vehicle andlock your vehicle.


Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to children.A child could operate power windows, othercontrols, or move the vehicle.

Caution!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Alwaysremove the key from the ignition and lockall of the doors when leaving the vehicleunattended.

Locking/UnlockingDoors From The Outside

When locking the doors from theoutside with the doors closed, push thelock button on the key fob.The door lock can be activated with alldoors locked and the trunk lid open.When the lock button on the key fob ispushed, all locks are activated,including the open trunk lid. The trunklid will be locked when it is closed.When unlocking the doors from theoutside, push the unlock button on thekey fob.Locking/Unlocking Doors FromThe Outside In An EmergencyIf the battery is discharged or the keyfob is inoperable, you can lock orunlock the doors from the outside byinserting the blade of the emergencykey, found inside the key fob, into thedoor handle lock cylinder and turn theemergency key as follows.

Lock — Turn the emergency key tothe right (clockwise)

Unlock — Turn the emergency key tothe left (counter clockwise)

Passive Entry —If EquippedThe Passive Entry system can identifythe presence of a key fob near thedoors and trunk lid.

The system enables the doors andtrunk lid to be locked or unlockedwithout pushing any button on the keyfob.The key fob is detected only after thesystem recognizes the presence of ahand on one of the front door handles.If the detected key fob is valid, thedoors and the trunk lid are unlocked(refer to the Information andEntertainment System Owner’s ManualSupplement for Passive Entry Settings).Note: The key fob may not be able tobe detected by the vehicle keyless-gosystem if it is located next to a mobilephone, laptop or other electronicdevice; these devices may block thekey fob’s wireless signal and preventthe keyless-go system from starting thevehicle.Grasping the handle of the driver's doorunlocks the driver's side door, or alldoors depending on the mode setusing the Information and EntertainmentSystem (refer to the Information andEntertainment System Owner’s ManualSupplement for Passive Entry Settings).Note: If wearing gloves, or if it hasrained and the door handle is wet, theactivation sensitivity of the PassiveEntry function may be reduced,resulting in a longer reaction time.

21

Door LockingTo lock the doors, proceed as follows:1. Make sure that you have the key foband are close to the driver’s orpassenger’s side door handle.

2. Push the Passive Entry door handlebutton or the Passive Entry trunk lidbutton, which is located next to theexterior trunk lid release button. This willlock all doors and the trunk lid. Doorlocking will activate the alarm as well.

Note: After pushing the Passive Entrydoor handle button, you must wait twoseconds before the doors can beunlocked again using the passive entrydoor handle button. This feature makesit possible to check whether the vehiclehas been locked correctly by pullingthe door handle within two seconds.The doors will not be unlocked again.The vehicle doors and trunk lid can belocked by pushing the lock button onthe key fob or on the interior door lock.Driver Side Door EmergencyOpeningIf the key fob does not work, e.g.because its battery is discharged or thevehicle battery is discharged, theemergency key can be used to unlockthe driver side door.To remove the emergency key from thekey fob, proceed as follows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inwardand extract the cover pullingdownwards.

2. Remove the emergency key fromthe key fob housing.

3. Insert the emergency key in thedriver side door lock cylinder and turn itto the left (counter clockwise) to unlockthe door.

Note:

The emergency key blade is notdirectional and can be insertedindifferently into the lock.

To avoid leaving the key fob insidethe vehicle accidentally, the PassiveEntry function features an automaticdoor unlocking function.

04056S0003EM


04056S0006EM

Passive Entry Trunk Lid Button

04016S0002EM

Emergency Key Release Buttons

04016S0003EM

Emergency Key

22

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

If one of the vehicle doors is openand the "door locking" button on thefront door handles or lock button in theinterior door lock switch panel ispushed, a check of the inside andoutside of the vehicle for the presenceof the key fob is made once all theopen doors are closed.

While pulling the handle, do not pushthe door lock/unlock button on thehandle.

If the key fob is detected inside thevehicle, the Passive Entry functionautomatically unlocks all the vehicledoors and flashes the turn signals.If one or more key fobs are inside thepassenger compartment, the lockbutton on the key fob inside thepassenger compartment is temporarilydisabled.The vehicle will not unlock the doors ifan unauthorized key fob has beendetected close to the outside of thevehicle.If the Passive Entry function is disabledusing the Information and EntertainmentSystem, the protections to avoidaccidentally leaving the key fob insidethe vehicle are deactivated.

Trunk Lid AccessApproaching the trunk lid with a validkey fob, push the opening button toaccess the trunk lid.

Note:If the key fob is inadvertently

forgotten inside of the trunk, and anattempt is made to close it fromoutside, the trunk lid will not lock.With the doors locked, the trunk lidunlocked, and the key fob detectedinside the vehicle, the trunk lid willunlock again and the lights flash twice.

Before driving, make sure the trunklid is closed correctly.

Trunk Lid LockThe trunk lid of the vehicle may still belocked by pushing the lock button onthe key fob, pushing the door lockbutton on the door handles, or pushingthe lock button on the interior doorpanel of the vehicle.

04056S0003EM


04056S0001EM

Interior Lock Switch Panel

04056S0004EM

Do NOT Grab The Door HandleWhen Locking

04056S0005EM

Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button

23

On vehicles equipped with PassiveEntry, the trunk lid and the doors canbe locked by pushing the buttonlocated near the opening button of thetrunk lid.

System Activation/DeactivationThe Passive entry system can beactivated or deactivated using theInformation and Entertainment System.

General Information

The following regulatory statementapplies to all radio frequency (RF)devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Power Lock —If Equipped

The Power Lock is a safety device thatprevents the operation of the interiordoor handles and the door locking andunlocking buttons. The Power Lockalso prevent opening of the doors frominside the passenger compartment.It is recommended to lock the vehicledoors each time the vehicle is parked.Activating The Power LockThe Power Lock is enabled on all thedoors by quickly pushing the lockbutton on the key fob twice.The turn signals will flash to let youknow that the Power Lock is active.If one or more of the doors are notclosed correctly, the Power Lock willnot activate, preventing a person fromgetting stuck inside the passengercompartment by entering the vehicle,and then closing, the open door.

Deactivating The Power LockThe Power Lock disengagesautomatically:

When the doors are unlocked, pushingthe unlock button on the key fob.

When the keyless ignition is placed inthe ON position.

Child Safety Locks

To provide a safer environment for smallchildren riding in the rear seats, the reardoors are equipped withChild-Protection Door Lock system.This device can be engaged only withthe doors open.

Lock position: device locked (dooropened from exterior only)

Unlock position: device unlocked(door may be opened from the inside)The Child Safety Locks remain lockedeven if the doors are unlocked.

04056S0006EM

Passive Entry Trunk Lid Button

04056S0007EM

Child Safety Lock Positions

24

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Note: The rear doors cannot beopened from the inside when theChild Safety Lock is engaged.

Unlocking The Doors WithA Discharged Battery

Proceed as follows to unlock the doorsif the vehicle battery is discharged.Rear Doors And Passenger Door

1. With the doors unlocked insert theemergency key from the key fob or aflat bladed screwdriver into the doorlock manual release lock cylinder.

2. Turn the manual release lockcylinder clockwise for the right doorlocks or counterclockwise for the leftdoor locks.

3. Remove the key/screwdriver fromthe manual release lock.

Proceed as follows to realign the doorlock device (only when the batterycharge has been restored):

Push the lock button on theelectronic key

Push the unlock button on the doorpanel

Unlock driver’s door lock with theemergency key

Operate the internal door handleNote: For the rear doors, if the ChildSafety Locks are engaged, and thepreviously described locking procedureis carried out, operating the internalhandle will not open the door. Instead, itwill only realign the lock release device.To open the door, the outside handlemust be used. The door centrallocking/unlocking buttons are notdeactivated when the emergency lockis engaged.

SEATSThe front seats can be adjusted toensure maximum comfort for theoccupants. When adjusting the driver’sseat, keep the shoulders resting firmlyagainst the backrest, and the wristswithin reach of the top of the steeringwheel. The driver must also be able tofully press the brake pedal.

Warning!

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

04056S0008EM

Door Lock Manual Release LockCylinder

25

Sparco Racing Seats —If Equipped

Forward/Rearward AdjustmentThe adjustment lever is at the front ofthe seat, near the floor. Pull the barupward to move the seat forward orrearward. Release the bar once the seatis in the position desired. Using bodypressure, move forward and rearwardon the seat to be sure that the seatadjusters have latched.

Height AdjustmentPush the height adjustment buttonupwards or downwards to obtain yourdesired height.

Seatback ReclineTo adjust the seatback, lift the reclinelever located on the outboard side ofthe seat, lean back to the desiredposition and release the lever. To returnthe seatback, lift the lever, lean forwardand release the lever.

Power Seats — If EquippedOn models equipped with power seats,the switch is located on the outboardside of the seat near the floor. Use thisswitch to move the driver's seat up,down, forward, and rearward, or torecline the seatback.

Caution!

Do not place any article under a powerseat or impede its ability to move as it maycause damage to the seat controls. Seattravel may become limited if movement isstopped by an obstruction in the seat'spath.

Forward/Rearward AdjustmentPush the seat switch forward orrearward to adjust to your desiredposition.

Seatback ReclineThe angle of the seatback can beadjusted forward or rearward. Push theseatback switch forward or rearward,and the seat will move in the directionof the switch. Release the switch whenthe desired position is reached.

Power Lumbar — If EquippedVehicles equipped with power driver orpassenger seats may also be equippedwith power lumbar. The power lumbarswitch is located on the outboard sideof the power seat. Push the switchforward or rearward to increase ordecrease the lumbar support. Push theswitch upward or downward to raise orlower the lumbar support.

04066S0002EM

Manual Seat Adjustment

1 — Adjustment Lever2 — Height Adjustment Button3 — Recline Lever

04066S0003EM

Power Seat Adjustment

1 — Seat Switch (Forward/Rearward/Height)2 — Seatback Switch3 — Lumbar Adjustment

26

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Height AdjustmentThe height of the seats can be adjustedup or down. Pull upward or pushdownward on the seat switch, and theseat will move in the direction of theswitch. Release the switch when thedesired position is reached.

Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting)The seat angle can be adjusted in fourdirections. Lift or push the front part ofseat switch to move the front part of theseat in the corresponding direction.Release the seat switch when the seathas reached the desired position.

Power Bolster AdjustmentPush the power bolster adjustmentbuttons to regulate the width of thebackrest through the lateral padding.

Driver Memory SeatThe driver memory seat buttons canstore and recall three different driver’sseat positions as well as outside powermirror positions. Storing and recalling ispossible with the ignition in the ON orSTOP positions and the driver’s sidedoor closed, or for three minutes afterhaving opened the driver's side door.The performed position memory isconfirmed by a beep. To set a memoryprofile, first adjust your seat (and powermirror position if desired) with thevarious controls until you are in thedesired position. Then, push thespecific button you want to assign theset position to for 1.5 seconds. When anew seat position is memorized, thepreviously memorized position on thesame button is automaticallyoverwritten. Recalling a memorizedposition is also possible forapproximately three minutes after thedoors are opened and approximatelyone minute after the engine is stopped.To recall a memorized position, pushthe relevant button briefly.

Warning!

Adjusting a seat while driving may bedangerous. Moving a seat while drivingcould result in loss of control which couldcause a collision and serious injury or death.

Seats should be adjusted before fasteningthe seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.Serious injury or death could result from apoorly adjusted seat belt.

Do not ride with the seatback reclinedso that the shoulder belt is no longerresting against your chest. In a collisionyou could slide under the seat belt, whichcould result in serious injury or death.

Heated Seats —If EquippedWith the engine in the ON position,push the driver or passenger heatedseat button located on theinstrument panel.

You can select three heating levels:

Minimum — one orange indicatorilluminated on the buttons

Average — two orange indicatorsilluminated on the buttons

04066S0015EM

Seatback Width Adjustment

4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons

04066S0004EM

Heated Seat Buttons

27

Maximum — three orange indicatorsilluminated on the buttonsAfter selecting a heating level, heat willbe felt within a few minutes.A quick push of the heated seat buttonwill select the heat levels in order oflowest to highest. Or, holding the switchdown from either “off” or the minimumlevel for 1–2 seconds will automaticallyselect the maximum heat level.When the heated seat function is notactive, pushing and holding the desiredheated seat button for 1–2 seconds willactivate the “fast maximum heating”function. The heater produces aboosted heat level for the first fewminutes of operation. After this, theheat automatically lowers to reach thenormal temperature level for the“maximum” setting.The “minimum” setting is automaticallydeactivated once a certain period oftime has elapsed. This varies on acase-by-case basis, in accordance withthe specific operating conditions.To lower the heat level, each quick pushof the switch will decrease by one leveluntil it is off. Holding the switch down atany of the three levels for 1-2 secondswill deactivate the heated seat.Note: To preserve the battery charge,this function cannot be activated whenthe engine is off.

Warning!

Persons who are unable to feel pain tothe skin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,medication, alcohol use, exhaustion orother physical condition must exercise carewhen using the seat heater. It may causeburns even at low temperatures, especiallyif used for long periods of time

Do not place anything on the seat orseatback that insulates against heat, suchas a blanket or cushion. This may causethe seat heater to overheat. Sitting in aseat that has been overheated could causeserious burns due to the increased surfacetemperature of the seat.

Rear SeatsThe rear seats allow for threepassengers.

Note: Middle Seat: The rear seat isdesigned as a 4+1 seat vehicle. Themiddle seat is of limited use. It isrecommended that this seat only beused by a person who can use thebackrest as a substitute for the headrestraint.

The seats and the seatbelts areconsidered components of the vehicle’sOccupant Restraint System.Note: Refer to the "Seat Belt Systems"in "Safety" for further information.

Split Folding Rear Seat —If EquippedThe rear seatbacks can be foldedforward to provide an additional storagearea.

04066S0005EM

Rear Seat

04066S0005EM

Rear Seat

28

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Partial Extension Of The LuggageCompartment (1/3 Or 2/3)Extending the right side of the trunkallows you to carry two passengers onthe left part of the rear seat, whileextending the left side allows you tocarry one passenger.Proceed as follows:

1. Completely lower the rear seat headrestraints.

2. Place the seatbelt so that it doesn'timpede the movement of the backrestwhile tilting it.

3. From inside the luggagecompartment, operate lever 1 to tilt theleft part or lever 2 to tilt the right part ofthe backrest: it will automatically tiltforward. If necessary, assist the backrestduring the initial stage of tilting.

Full Expansion Of The TrunkTilting the rear seat forward completelyallows maximum loading volume.Proceed as follows:

1. Completely lower the rear seat headrestraints.

2. Place the seatbelts so that theydon't impede the movement of thebackrest while tilting it.

3. From inside the luggagecompartment, use levers 1 and 2 tofold down the backrests; these will folddown forwards automatically. Ifnecessary, accompany the backrestsduring the initial stage of tilting.

Repositioning The BackrestsMove the seatbelts to the side, makingsure that they are correctly extendedand not twisted, and that they are nottrapped behind the backrests of theseats. Then, lift the backrests, pushingthem back until you hear the lockingclick on both attachment mechanisms.

Warning!

Be certain that the seatback is securelylocked into position. If the seatback is notsecurely locked into position the seat willnot provide the proper stability for childseats and/or passengers. An improperlylatched seat could cause serious injury.

Center Backrest Section TiltingBefore tilting the backrest, make surethat the rear center seatbelt is notfastened and that there aren't anyobjects in the middle part of thecushion (if there are any, remove them).Using the release strap, release thecenter part of the backrest from itshousing and tilt it using the headrestraint.

Center Backrest SectionRepositioningUsing the head restraint, lift the centerportion upwards, accompanying itduring its movement, and lightly push tomake sure that it is properly attached.Make sure that the armrest is properlyattached by attempting to move it. If itis not attached, repeat the operation.04066S0007EM

Seat Release Levers

1 — Left Side Seat Release Lever2 — Right Side Seat Release Lever

04066S0008EM

Center Backrest Section Tilting

29

HEAD RESTRAINTSHead restraints are designed to reducethe risk of injury by restricting headmovement in the event of a rear impact.Head restraints should be adjusted sothat the top of the head restraint islocated above the top of your ear.

Warning!

A loose head restraint thrown forward ina collision or hard stop could cause seriousinjury or death to occupants of the vehicle.Always securely stow removed headrestraints in a location outside theoccupant compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST bereinstalled in the vehicle to properly protectthe occupants. Follow the re-installationinstructions above prior to operating thevehicle or occupying a seat.

Do not place items over the top of theReactive Head Restraint, such as coats,seat covers or portable DVD players.These items may interfere with theoperation of the Reactive Head Restraint inthe event of a collision and could result inserious injury or death.

Racing Seat HeadRestraints

Your vehicle may be equipped withnon-adjustable head restraints on thedriver's and passenger's seatbacks.

The non-adjustable head restraintsconsist of a trimmed foam coveringover the upper structure of theseatbacks and are intended to helpprotect you and the passenger fromneck injury.Adjust the seatbacks to their upright,on-road positions so that the headrestraint is positioned as close aspossible to the back of your head.

Front Head Restraints(Adjustments) —If Equipped

The front head restraints may beheight-adjustable. To adjust them,operate as follows:

Upward adjustment: Raise the headrestraint until it clicks into place.

Downward adjustment: Push theadjustment button and push downwardon the head restraint to lower.

Warning!

All occupants, including the driver,should not operate a vehicle or sit in avehicle’s seat until the head restraints areplaced in their proper positions in order tominimize the risk of neck injury in the eventof a crash.

Head restraints should never beadjusted while the vehicle is in motion.Driving a vehicle with the head restraints

improperly adjusted or removed couldcause serious injury or death in the eventof a collision.

Note: To allow maximum visibility forthe driver, if the head restraints are notused, lower the head restraints to thefully down position.

Rear Head Restraints(Adjustments)

Warning!

All occupants, including the driver,should not operate a vehicle or sit in avehicle’s seat until the head restraints areplaced in their proper positions in order tominimize the risk of neck injury in the eventof a crash.

Head restraints should never beadjusted while the vehicle is in motion.Driving a vehicle with the head restraintsimproperly adjusted or removed couldcause serious injury or death in the eventof a collision.

The height of the outboard headrestraints can be adjusted. The headrestraint of the center seat, if equipped,cannot be adjusted, only removed.For upward adjustment, pull up on thehead restraint until it clicks into place.

30

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

For downward adjustment, push in theadjustment button and lower the headrestraint while holding the button to thedesired height.

Note: To allow maximum visibility forthe driver, if the head restraints are notin use, lower the head restraints to thefully down position.

Head Restraints(Removal)

To remove the head restraints, proceedas follows:

1. Raise the head restraints to theirmaximum height.

2. Push the adjustment button and therelease button at the side of the twosupports.

3. Remove the head restraints bypulling them upwards.To reinstall the head restraints, proceedas follows:

1. Hold down both the adjustmentbutton and release button while placingthe head restraint post into the holes.

2. Then, reposition the head restraintto the appropriate height for thepassengers.

Warning!

A loose head restraint thrown forward ina collision or hard stop could cause seriousinjury or death to occupants of the vehicle.Always securely stow removed headrestraints in a location outside theoccupant compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST bereinstalled in the vehicle to properly protectthe occupants. Follow the re-installationinstructions above prior to operating thevehicle or occupying a seat.

STEERING WHEELAdjustmentsThis feature allows you to tilt the steeringcolumn upward or downward. It alsoallows you to lengthen or shorten thesteering column. The tilt/telescopinglever is located below the steering wheelat the end of the steering column.

04076S0002EM

Rear Head Restraint

1 — Adjustment Button2 — Release Button

04086S0001EM

Steering Wheel Adjustment1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control HandleA — OpenB — Closed

31

Warning!

Do not adjust the steering column whiledriving. Adjusting the steering column whiledriving or driving with the steering columnunlocked, could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle. Failure to follow thiswarning may result in serious injury ordeath.

To Adjust The Position:

1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping ControlHandle down to the open position.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to thedesired position.

3. Lock the desired position bypushing the Tilt/Telescoping ControlHandle to the closed position.

Warning!

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out anyafter-market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifications(e.g. installation of anti-theft device) thatcould adversely affect performance.Doing so could void the New VehicleLimited Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETYPROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY,and also result in the vehicle not meetingtype-approval requirements.

Heated Steering Wheel— If EquippedWhile the engine is running, push theheated steering wheel button on theinstrument panel.

When the function is enabled, theindicator on the button will illuminate.

Warning!

Persons who are unable to feel pain tothe skin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or otherphysical conditions must exercise care whenusing the steering wheel heater. It may causeburns even at low temperatures, especially ifused for long periods.

Do not place anything on the steeringwheel that insulates against heat, such asa blanket or steering wheel covers of anytype and material. This may cause thesteering wheel heater to overheat.

MIRRORSElectrochromic Mirror

This mirror automatically adjusts forheadlight glare from vehicles behindyou.The electrochromic mirror has a powerbutton to activate/deactivate theautomatic dimming/anti-glaringfunction.

When the vehicle is in REVERSE,the automatic dimming feature isdeactivated.

04086S0002EM

Heated Steering Wheel Button

04106S0002EM

Electrochromic MirrorPower Button

32

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Outside Power Mirrors

Power AdjustmentThe power mirrors can be adjusted withthe ignition ON.Select the desired mirror using thepower mirror control.

To adjust the selected mirror, push theknob in the direction desired.Note: Once adjustment is complete,rotate the knob to the neutral positionto prevent accidental movements.

Power FoldingWith the power mirror control knob inthe neutral position, move it to thepower folding position. Move the knobagain to return the mirrors to the drivingposition.If the power mirror control knob ismoved again during door mirror folding(from closed to open position and viceversa), the movement direction isreversed.Automatic ActivationActivating the central door lockingsystem from outside the vehicleautomatically folds the mirrors. Themirrors return to the driving positionwhen the ignition is cycled to the ONposition.If the door mirrors were folded using thepower mirror control knob, they canonly be returned to the driving positionby rotating the knob again.Note: The power folding operation canbe enabled only when the vehiclespeed is lower than 31 mph (50 km/h).They can only be manually controlledup to that speed.

Automatic Dimming Mirrors —If EquippedLike the electrochromic mirror, anautomatic dimming feature is alsoavailable on the outside rear viewmirrors to prevent glare. The automaticdimming button is the same for all rearview mirrors.

Warning!

Vehicles and other objects seen in anoutside convex mirror will look smaller andfarther away than they really are. Relyingtoo much on side convex mirrors couldcause you to collide with another vehicle orother object. Use your inside mirror whenjudging the size or distance of a vehicleseen in a side convex mirror.

Heated Mirrors

Push the rear defrost button in theclimate controls to activate the heatedmirrors.

04106S0004EM

Power Mirror Control

1 — Power Mirror Control KnobA — LeftB — RightC — Power Folding PositionD — Neutral

33

EXTERIOR LIGHTSHeadlight SwitchThe headlight switch is located to the leftof the steering wheel on the instrumentpanel. This switch controls the operationof the headlights, parking lights,instrument panel lights, instrument panellight dimming, interior lights and rear foglights.In addition, there are buttons forparking sensors deactivation andstop/start. Refer to “Starting AndOperating” for further information.

The exterior lights can be activated onlywhen the ignition is in the ON position,except for the parking lights. Refer to"Parking Lights" in this section for moreinformation.The instrument panel and the variouscontrols on the dashboard will beilluminated when the exterior lights areturned on.

Automatic Headlights

This system automatically turns theheadlights on or off according toambient light levels.

Function ActivationFrom the O (OFF) position, turn the lightswitch to the (AUTO) position.Note: The function can only operatewith the ignition position cycled to ON.

Function DeactivationTo deactivate the function, turn the lightswitch to a position other than the

(AUTO) position.

Daytime Running Lights(DRL)With the ignition in the ON mode andthe light switch turned to the

position, if the dusk sensor detectssufficient external light, the DaytimeRunning Lights will turn onautomatically while the other lightsremain off.

If the turn signals are operated, thebrightness of the correspondingDaytime Running Lights will bedecreased as long as the turn signalsare on.If equipped, the DRL can beactivated/deactivated from theInformation and Entertainment System,by selecting the following functions insequence on the main MENU:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. Daytime Running Lights.”

Note: The Daytime Running Lightscannot be deactivated in Canadianmarkets.

Rear Fog Light

The rear fog light switch is integratedwith the headlight switch.Push the button to turn the rear foglights on/off.The rear fog lights turn on only whenthe headlights or parking lights areturned on. The lights can be turned offby pushing the button again or byturning the headlight switch to the O(off) position.When the engine is stopped with therear fog lights on, they will remain offthe next time the engine is started.

04126S0001NA

Headlight Switch

1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation Button2 — Parking Light, Daylight RunningLights, Headlight Switch3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer4 — Rear Fog Light Button5 — Stop/Start Button

34

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Parking Lights

With the ignition in the STOP position,turn the headlight switch to the

position to turn the parking lights on.All of the parking lights will turn on foreight minutes, and opening the dooractivates an audible warning.To leave only the lights on one side(right/left) illuminated, you must move themultifunction lever (located on the leftside of the steering wheel) to the sidethat you want to remain on. With theparking lights on, the warning light onthe instrument panel will come on.Note: Placing the ignition to ON turnsoff the parking lights, which were onlyilluminated on one side.

Headlight Off Delay

The “Headlight Off Delay” functiondelays the turning off of the headlightsafter the vehicle has been stopped.The function can be activated from theInformation and Entertainment Systemby selecting the following functions insequence on the main menu:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. “Headlight Off Delay.”The side lights and the headlights stayon for a time that can be set between30, 60, and 90 seconds.

Function ActivationWith the headlights on, cycle the ignitionto STOP mode, the timer will then start.Note: To activate this function, theheadlights must be deactivated withintwo minutes after the ignition has beencycled to STOP.

Function DeactivationThis function is deactivated by turningon the headlights, the side lights, or bycycling the ignition to ON.

High Beam HeadlightsTo activate the fixed high beamheadlights, push the multifunction lever,located on the left side of the steeringwheel, towards the instrument panel.The headlight switch must be turned tothe (AUTO) or (ON) position.With high beam headlights on, the

High Beam Indicator on theinstrument panel will illuminate.

The high beam headlights are turned offby pulling the lever to its originalposition. The warning light/icon willturn off in the instrument panel whenthe headlights are turned off.

Flashing The HeadlightsPulling the multifunction lever towardthe steering wheel will activate the highbeam headlights manually. The lightswill remain on as long as the lever isheld. Once the lever is released, thelights will resume the previous position.

Automatic High Beam Headlights —If EquippedThe Automatic High Beam Headlightssystem provides increased forwardlighting at night by automating highbeam control through the use of adigital camera mounted on thewindshield. This camera detects vehiclespecific light and automatically switchesfrom high beams to low beams until theapproaching vehicle is out of view.This function is enabled with theInformation and Entertainment System,and can only be activated with the lightswitch turned to (AUTO).If the high beam headlights are on, theblue icon/warning light will illuminatein the instrument panel.

04126S0020EM

Multifunction Lever

35

When the speed is higher than 37 mph(60 km/h) and the function is active, thelights will turn off if the multifunctionlever is pushed again.When the speed is lower than 15 mph(25 km/h) and the function is active,the function switches the high beamheadlights off.If the high beam headlights areoperated quickly again (pushing themultifunction lever towards theinstrument panel), the warning light/icon

will illuminate in the instrumentpanel, and the main beam headlightswill turn on constantly until the speedexceeds 37 mph (60 km/h).When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h)is exceeded again, the automaticfunctioning is reactivated.If the multifunction lever is pushedagain with the Automatic High BeamHeadlights activated, the Automatic HighBeam Headlights function deactivates.To deactivate the automatic headlightfunction, rotate the headlight switch tothe position.Note: If the system recognizes heavytraffic areas, the automatic functionsremain disabled independently of thevehicle’s speed.

Turn SignalsTo activate the turn signals function,move the multifunction lever, located onthe left side of the steering wheel, up ordown until it reaches the detent. Movingthe lever upward flashes the right turnsignal and moving the lever downwardwill flash the left turn signal.The or turn signal will blink on theinstrument panel.The turn signals turn off automaticallywhen the vehicle is brought back onto astraight course.

“Lane Change” FunctionTap the lever up or down once, withoutmoving beyond the detent, and the turnsignal (right or left) will flash five times.Then, the turn signal (right or left) willautomatically turn off.To turn off the flashing before the end ofthe cycle, move the lever in theopposite direction until the first click(about half way).

Static Bending LightFunction (SBL) — IfEquippedThe SBL function utilizes Light EmittingDiodes (LEDs) in order to betterilluminate the street and increase thelight angle while turning. This function isenabled by rotating the light switch toposition or (AUTO). The SBLLEDs activate when the speed is below25 mph (40 km/h).This function can be activated/deactivated on the Information andEntertainment System by selecting thefollowing functions in sequence on themain menu:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. “Cornering Lights.”

36

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

INTERIOR LIGHTSFront Map Reading Lights

The front map/reading and overheadlights are mounted in the overheadconsole. Each light can be turned on bypushing the corresponding switch onthe console. These switches are backlitfor night time visibility. To turn the lightsoff, push the switch a second time.

Note: Before getting out of the vehicle,ensure that the overhead lights are off.This will prevent the battery level frombeing drained once the doors are

closed. If a light is left on accidently, theoverhead lights turn off automaticallyapproximately 15 minutes after theengine has been turned OFF.

Overhead Light Timing — If EquippedOn certain models, to assist getting inand out of the vehicle at night or inpoorly-lit areas, two timed modes havebeen provided.Timing While Getting Into TheVehicle — The overhead lights turn onaccording to the following modes:

Will illuminate for a few secondswhen the doors are unlocked.

Will illuminate for approximately threeminutes when one of the doors isopened.

Will illuminate for a few secondswhen the doors are locked.Timing is interrupted when the ignitionis cycled to ON.Three Modes Are Provided ForSwitching Off:

When all doors are closed afterentering the vehicle, the three-minutetimer will stop and a seconds timer willstart for the interior lights. This timing willstop when the ignition is cycled to ON.

When doors are locked (either withkey fob or with key inserted on driverside door), the overhead light turns off.

The interior lights will turn off after15 minutes to preserve the battery.

Timing While Getting Out Of TheVehicle — After cycling the ignition toSTOP, the overhead lights will turn onas follows:

For a few seconds after the enginestops.

For approximately three minuteswhen one of the doors is opened.

For a few seconds when the lastdoor is closed.The timing stops automatically whenthe doors are locked.

Vanity Mirror Lights — If EquippedOn the driver and passenger sun visor,there is a light which illuminates the sunvisor mirror when folded down.

The courtesy light turns onautomatically by lifting the cover.

04136S0001EM

Overhead Console

1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch3 — Overhead Lights Switch4 — Front Map Reading Lights Switch5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map LightSwitch6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light7 — Center Reading/Map Light8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light

04136S0002EM

Sun Visor Mirror

1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover

37

Glove CompartmentLightThis light turns on automatically whenthe glove compartment is opened andturns off when it is closed.The light turns on and off regardless ofthe ignition status.

Interior Ambient Lighting

The brightness of the interior passengercompartment lights can be adjusted viathe Information and EntertainmentSystem.To access the adjustment function, onthe main menu select the followingitems in sequence:

1. "Settings."

2. "Interior Ambient Lighting."

3. "Lights."The lights can be adjusted to sevendifferent levels of brightness.

Door LightThis vehicle is equipped with doorcourtesy lamps that illuminate the entryway for the driver or passenger whenthe door is opened, and turns off whenit is closed.The light turns on and off regardless ofthe ignition status.

On vehicles equipped with a "PassiveEntry" system, another light can befound under each exterior door handle.

Rear Overhead LightThe rear overhead light buttons areactivated or deactivated by two on/offswitches on the front map reading lights.

The light turns on when a door isopened.Note: The light will turn offautomatically after a few minutes if adoor is left open. To turn it on again,open another door or close and reopenthe same door.

04136S0003EM

Glove Compartment Light 04136S0007EM

Door Light

04136S0005EM

Exterior Door Handle Light

04136S0004EM

Rear Overhead Light

1 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light2 — Driver Rear Overhead Light3 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch4 — Passenger Rear Overhead LightSwitch

38

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Luggage CompartmentCourtesy Lights

The luggage compartment features twocourtesy lights.These courtesy lights turn onautomatically when the trunk is openedand turn off when it is closed.

The courtesy lights will turn on and offregardless of the position of the ignitionswitch.Note: If the trunk is left open, the lightswill automatically turn off after15 minutes to preserve battery life.

Instrument PanelDimmer Control

With the daytime running lights orheadlights on, rotate the dimmer controlupward to increase the instrumentpanel brightness and the control buttonicons. Rotate the dimmer controldownward to decrease brightness.

WINDSHIELD WIPERSWindshield Wiper Stalk

The windshield wiper stalk is located onthe right side of the steering wheel.The windshield wipers will only operatewith the ignition cycled to ON.

Caution!

Turn the windshield wipers off whendriving through an automatic car wash.Damage to the windshield wipers mayresult if the wiper control is left in anyposition other than off.

In cold weather, always turn off thewiper switch and allow the wipers to returnto the “Park” position before turning off theengine. If the wiper switch is left on and thewipers freeze to the windshield, damage tothe wiper motor may occur when thevehicle is restarted.

Always remove any buildup of snowthat prevents the windshield wiper bladesfrom returning to the off position. If thewindshield wiper control is turned off andthe blades cannot return to the off position,damage to the wiper motor may occur.

04136S0006EM

Luggage Compartment CourtesyLights

04126S0055EM

Dimmer Control

39

Windshield Wiper/Washers

Operation: The switch on the wiperstalk can be set to the followingpositions:

Windshield Wiper Off.Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing.High Sensitivity Rain Sensing.Low Continuous Wiper Speed.High Continuous Wiper Speed.

Windshield Wiper OperationRotating the switch to the positionactivates the first (low) level continuousspeed of the windshield wipers inmanual mode.Rotating the switch to the positionactivates the second (high) levelcontinuous speed of the windshieldwipers in manual mode.

Rain SensorsRotating the switch to the position,activates the first, less sensitive level ofthe Rain Sensing function.Rotating the switch to the position,activates the second, more sensitive levelof the Rain Sensing function. Refer to“Rain Sensor” in this section for moreinformation on how this system functions.

Windshield Washer OperationPull the stalk toward the steering wheelto operate the windshield washer.Keep the stalk pulled to activate both thewindshield washer jet and the windshieldwiper with a single movement. Thewipers and washers will continue tooperate until you let go of the stalk.The windshield wiper stops workingthree strokes after the stalk is released,followed by a final stroke six secondslater to complete the cycle.

MistUse this feature when weatherconditions make occasional usage ofthe wipers necessary. Push the stalkupward to the MIST position andrelease for a single wiping cycle. Thisfunction is useful to remove smalldeposits of dust from the windshield ormorning dew.

Note: This function does not activatethe windshield washer. To spraywindshield washer fluid onto thewindshield, the washing function mustbe used.

Warning!

Sudden loss of visibility through thewindshield could lead to a collision.You might not see other vehicles or otherobstacles. To avoid sudden icing of thewindshield during freezing weather, warmthe windshield with the defroster beforeand during windshield washer use.

Rain SensorThe Rain Sensor is located behind theinterior rear view mirror. This featuresenses moisture on the windshield andautomatically activates the wipers forthe driver.

04146S0001EM

Windshield Wiper Switch

04146S0002EM

Rain Sensor

40

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

The feature is especially useful forroad splash or over spray from thewindshield washers of the vehicleahead. Rotate the end of themultifunction lever to one of foursettings to activate this feature.The sensor has an adjustment rangethat varies progressively from wiper still(no stroke) when the windshield is dry,to wiper at continuous speed (fastoperation) with intense rain.

ActivationRotating the wiper switch to position

or activates the rain sensor.The activation of the rain sensor systemis done by tapping the wiper stalkupwards while the switch is in the or

position.The variation in sensitivity during rainsensor operation is also signaled by astroke of the wiper (command acquiredand implemented). This stroke is alsoexecuted with the windshield dry.If the windshield washer is used withthe rain sensor activated, the normalwashing cycle is performed, after whichthe rain sensor resumes its normalautomatic operation.Note: Keep the glass in the sensorarea clean.

DeactivationUse the wiper switch or cycle theignition to STOP.If the ignition is cycled to the STOPposition and the wiper switch is left in

or position, no wiping cycle willoccur even if it rains when the vehicle isnext started (ignition at ON).This prevents accidental activation ofthe rain sensor when the engine isstarted (e.g. when the windshield isbeing washed by hand or the wipersare stuck to the windshield by ice).You can restore the automaticfunctioning of the rain sensor bytapping the wiper stalk upwards oncethe vehicle has been restarted.When the rain sensor is reactivatedusing any of the functions describedabove, reactivation is indicated by asingle tap of the windshield wipers,regardless of the condition of thewindshield.In the event of malfunction of the rainsensor while it is active, the windshieldwiper operates intermittently at a speedconsistent with the sensitivity setting ofthe rain sensor, whether or not there israin on the glass for as long as thesensor failure is indicated on the display.

The sensor continues to operate and itis possible to set the windshield wiperto continuous mode or . Thefailure indication remains on for as longas the sensor is active.The rain sensor is able to recognize andautomatically adjust itself in thepresence of the following conditions:

Presence of dirt on the controlledsurface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.).

Presence of streaks of water causedby the worn window wiper blades.

Difference between day and night.

41

CLIMATE CONTROLPassengerCompartment Air Vents

Side Air VentsTo adjust the position of the Side Air

Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster(2) in any direction.

Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2)to adjust the air flow. Rotating the SideAir Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will closethe vent. Rotating it counterclockwisewill open the vent.

Central Air VentsTo adjust the position of the Central

Air Vents, move the Central Air VentAdjuster (2) up or down.

Rotate the Central Air Vent Air FlowAdjuster (3) to adjust the air flow.Rotating Central Air Vent Air FlowAdjuster (3) up will open the vents,allowing for maximum airflow. Rotatingit down will close the vents.

Rear Air VentsTo adjust the position of the Rear Air

Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster(2) in any direction.

Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2)to adjust the air flow. Rotating the RearAir Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will closethe vent. Rotating it counterclockwisewill open the vent.

04156S0002EM

Side Air Vents

1 — Demister Air Vents2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster

04156S0003EM

Central Air Vents

1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster3 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster4 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent

04156S0004EM

Rear Air Vents

1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster

42

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System

Controls

04156S0005EM

Automatic Climate Control System

1. Driver Temperature Adjustment Knob 6. Rear Defrost Button 11. Passenger Heated Seat Button —If Equipped

2. Driver Side AUTO Button (AutomaticOperation)

7. Passenger Side Air Distribution Selec-tion Button

12. Air Conditioning On/Off Button

3. Driver Side Air Distribution SelectionButton

8. Passenger Side AUTO Button (Auto-matic Operation)

13. Steering Wheel Heater Button —If Equipped

4. Front Defrost Button (Rapid Defrosting) 9. Passenger Temperature AdjustmentKnob

14. Driver Side Heated Seat Button —If Equipped

5. Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10. SYNC Button – Sets TemperatureAlignment Between Driver & PassengerSide

15. Air Recirculation Button

43

Caution!

The system uses R1234yf refrigerant,which does not pollute the environment inthe event of accidental leakage. Under nocircumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids,which are incompatible with thecomponents of this system.

Description

The Automatic Dual Zone ClimateControl System adjusts the temperatureand air distribution independentlybetween the driver and passenger.The system maintains the settemperature inside the passengercompartment and compensates foroutside temperature change.Note: The reference temperature is72 °F (22 °C) for optimal comfortmanagement.The automatic setting will adjust thefollowing to maintain comfort within thepassenger compartment:

Air temperature from the driver/frontpassenger side vents

Air distribution from the driver/frontpassenger side vents

Fan speed (continuous variation ofthe air flow)

Compressor variations (forcooling/dehumidifying the air)

Air recirculation

The Climate Control System can alsobe operated manually by using thebuttons and knobs on the faceplate.Manual selections will override theautomatic settings, which are storeduntil the AUTO button is pushed. If thesystem intervenes for safety reasons,the automatic setting will take control ofthe system.The below operations will notdeactivate the automatic (AUTO)function:

Air Recirculation activation/deactivation

A/C activation/deactivationSYNC function activationRear Window Defrost activation/

deactivationWhen in AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinternal temperature is controlledaccording to the set temperature.The following can be manually set oradjusted:

Driver/passenger air temperatureBlower speed (continuous variation)Air distribution (seven positions for

driver and passenger)A/C activationFront DefrosterAir recirculationRear DefrosterSystem deactivation

Operating Mode

The Climate Control system can beactivated in different ways. It isrecommended to use the automaticfunction. Push the AUTO button andset the desired temperatures.The automatic system adjusts thetemperature, quantity, and distributionof air introduced into the passengercompartment. It also controls airrecirculation and the activation of the airconditioner.At any time during automatic operation,you can change the temperature,activate or deactivate the RearDefroster, activate SYNC, activate ordeactivate the air conditioner, andactivate or deactivate air recirculation.The system will automatically adjust tothe new settings.

Climate Control DisplaySettings

The Climate Control settings are visibleon the Information and EntertainmentSystem radio screen.The display on the Information andEntertainment System is a pop upwindow (1), which is activated bypushing the buttons or turning theknobs on the Climate Control system.The indicator lights located on thenumber of buttons and knobs indicatethat the selected feature is on/off.

44

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

If no operation is performed for apredetermined time, the pop-up willclose on the display.

Air TemperatureAdjustment

Rotate the driver or passengerTemperature Adjustment Knobclockwise for warmer temperatures orcounterclockwise for coolertemperatures. The set temperatures areshown on the Information andEntertainment System.Push the SYNC button to sync thedriver and passenger air temperatures.Rotate the passenger TemperatureAdjustment Knob to cancel the SYNCfunction. This will set a new passengerside temperature.Rotate the Temperature AdjustmentKnob fully clockwise to engage the HI(maximum heating) setting or fully

counterclockwise to engage the LO(maximum cooling) setting. Todeactivate these functions, rotate theTemperature Adjustment Knob to thedesired temperature.Rear passengers’ temperature is linkedto driver side selection.

Air DistributionSelection

Push the Air Distribution Selectionbutton on the faceplate to change themode of air distribution.

Air flow to the windshield anddemister window vents todemist/defrost them.

Air flow at the central and sidedashboard vents to ventilate thechest and the face.

Air flow to the front and rear floorvents. This setting heats thepassenger compartment thequickest.

Air flow distributed between thefloor vents (hotter air) and thecentral and side dashboard vents(cooler air). This air distributionsetting is useful on sunny daysduring spring and autumn.

Air flow distributed between thefloor vents, windshield, and frontside window defrosting/demistingvents. This distribution settingwarms the passengercompartment while preventing thewindows from fogging up.

Air flow distribution between thewindshield demisting/defrostingvents, and side/central dashboardvents. This distribution settingsends air to the windshield insunny conditions.

Air flow distribution to all vents onthe vehicle.

In AUTO mode, the Climate Controlsautomatically manage the airdistribution. When set manually, therespective symbols on the Informationand Entertainment System indicate theair distribution setting.

Fan Speed Adjustment

Turn the Blower Speed Knob toincrease or decrease the blower speed.The speed is displayed with lightedindicators in the Information andEntertainment System display.

Maximum fan speed = all indicatorsilluminated on the Information andEntertainment System display

04156S0006EM

1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display

45

Minimum fan speed = one indicatorilluminated on the Information andEntertainment System displayThe fan can be turned off by rotatingthe Blower Speed Knobcounterclockwise to position O(all segments on the Information andEntertainment System display areturned off).Note: To restore automatic control ofthe fan speed, push the AUTO button.

AUTO Button

When the AUTO button is pushed(indicator illuminated), the ClimateControl system automatically adjuststhe following settings:

Quantity and distribution of air flow inthe passenger compartment

The air conditionerAir recirculationCancels any manual settings

Selecting the AUTO function illuminatesthe indicator on the A/C button .If air distribution or the fan speed ismanual adjusted, the AUTO buttonindicator will turn off to indicate that theClimate Control system is no longer inAUTO mode.After a manual adjustment, push theAUTO button to resume the automaticsystem.

SYNC Button

Push the SYNC button (indicatorilluminated) to sync the passenger sideair temperature with the driver side airtemperature.This function makes temperatureregulation easier when the driver istraveling alone.Turn the passenger TemperatureAdjustment Knob or push thepassenger side Air DistributionSelection Button to change thepassenger side air temperature andreturn to separate air temperaturemanagement.

Air Recirculation And AirQuality System (AQS)

Air Recirculation is managed accordingto the following operating mode:

Automatic engagement: indicator isilluminated above the “A” on the AirRecirculation Button

Forced activation (air circulationalways activated): indicator illuminatedabove the icon on the AirRecirculation Button

Forced deactivation (air recirculationalways off with intake of outside air):both indicators not illuminated on theAir Recirculation ButtonThe three operating conditions areobtained by pushing the AirRecirculation Button in sequence.

Enabling The Air Quality System(AQS) Function — If EquippedWhen the automatic recirculationfunction is selected, the AQS functionautomatically activates internal airrecirculation when the outside air ispolluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels).At low external temperatures or in highhumidity, the automatic function turnsoff to avoid fogging up the windows.The user can select the function againby pushing the Air Recirculation Button.In automatic operation, air recirculationwill be controlled by the systemaccording to outside environmentalconditions.

Note:

With the AQS function active andafter the internal air recirculationsystem has been functioning for a setamount of time, the Climate ControlSystem enables air intake to cycle theair in the passenger compartment for aset time. The AQS function is disabledduring the air changes.

The engagement of the recirculationsystem makes it possible to reach therequired heating or cooling conditionsfaster. It is, however, inadvisable to useit on rainy/cold days as it can increasethe possibility of the windows fogging.When the outside temperature is low,recirculation is forced off to prevent thewindows from fogging up.

46

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

A/C Compressor

Push the A/C button to activate ordeactivate the A/C compressor(indicator illuminated when activated).The A/C compressor will remain offeven after the engine has stopped.When the A/C compressor is turned off,the system deactivates air recirculationto prevent the windows from foggingup. If the climate control system canmaintain the temperature, with the A/Cturned off, the AUTO feature will remainon and the AUTO button indicator lightwill not switch off.To restore automatic control of the A/Ccompressor, push the A/C button orthe AUTO button. With the A/Ccompressor off, the air speed can beset manually using the Air SpeedAdjustment Knob.When the A/C compressor is on, andthe engine is running, air speed cannotbe lower than the minimum speed(only one indicator light is lit).Note: When the A/C is off the ClimateControl system can not produce air thatis colder than the current outsidetemperature. Under certainenvironmental conditions, windowscould fog up rapidly, since the air is notdehumidified.

Front Defroster AndMAX-DEF Function

Push the Front Defroster button(indicator illuminated) to defrost the

windshield and side windows.While in MAX-DEF function, the airconditioner will:

Activate the air conditionercompressor when the weather allows

Turn air recirculation offSet the maximum air temperature (HI)

on both the driver and passenger sideActivate a blower speed based on

the temperature of the engine coolantAdjust the air flow towards the

windshield and front side windowsActivate the Rear Window DefrosterDisplay the fan speed (indicators

illuminated) and current air distributionsettingNote: The MAX-DEF function remainsactive for approximately three minutesonce the engine coolant reaches theproper temperature.When the function is on, AUTO modewill deactivate. The only manualoperations possible are adjustingblower speed and turning off the RearWindow Defroster.Pushing the button switches off theMAX-DEF function.

Rear Defroster

Push the Rear Defroster button toactivate (indicators illuminated) theRear Defroster.The Rear Defroster will turn off after20 minutes or once the engine is turnedoff. To reactive the Rear Defroster, pushthe Rear Defroster button.Note: To avoid damage, do not applystickers over the interior heatingfilaments of the Rear Defroster.

Humidity Sensor

The Humidity Sensor helps to preventthe windows from fogging up. The AUTOfunction (indicator illuminated) must beon for the Humidity Sensor to function.When outside temperature is low, thesystem may turn the compressor onand turn air recirculation off for saferdriving.

47

Switching Off/On TheClimate Control System

Switching Off The Climate ControlSystemRotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knobcompletely counterclockwise to turn offthe Climate Control System.With the air conditioner off:

Air recirculation is onThe A/C compressor is offThe fan is offThe heated rear window can be

activated/deactivatedNote: The climate control systemstores the previously set temperaturesand resumes operation when anybutton on the system is pushed.

Switching On The Climate ControlSystemTo switch the climate control system onin automatic mode, push the AUTObutton.

Stop/Start

The climate control system managesthe Stop/Start system. Stop/Start hasthe engine shut off when vehicle speedis 0 mph (0 km/h) to maintain comfortwithin the vehicle.

Stop/Start will deactivate in thefollowing scenarios:

The climate control system is inAUTO mode (indicator illuminated), andthe vehicle has yet to reach the settemperature

The climate control system is in LOmaximum cooling

The climate control system is in HImaximum heating

The climate control system is in theMAX-DEF statusWhen the Stop/Start system is active,the engine will restart if the insidetemperature changes significantly, or ifthe LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, isactivated.With Stop/Start system on, air flow isreduced to keep the compartmentcomfort conditions for longer.Until the temperature drasticallychanges within the cabin, the climatecontrol system will continue to maintainthe temperature while the engine is off.By deactivating the Stop/Start systemwith the button located on thedashboard, the climate control systemwill take priority over the engineshutting off.

Note:

In harsh climate conditions, limit theuse of the Stop/Start system toprevent the compressor fromcontinuously switching on and off.This will cause rapid misting of thewindows and the accumulation ofhumidity in the passengercompartment.

When the Stop/Start system is on,the climate control system will alwaystake air in from outside, reducing theprobability of the windows fogging up.

Additional Heater —If EquippedNote: The additional heaterautomatically operates if the outsidetemperature and engine coolanttemperature are low. The heater will notoperate if battery voltage is low.

System Maintenance

In winter, the Climate Control Systemmust be turned on at least once amonth for approximately ten minutes.Have the system inspected at anauthorized dealer before the summer.

48

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

POWER WINDOWSPower Window Switches

The power window switches work withthe ignition in the ON position and forthree minutes after the ignition hasbeen placed in the STOP position.When one of the front doors is opened,this operation is disabled.Driver Side Front Door ControlsThe switches are located on the doorpanel trim. All windows can be controlledfrom the driver side door panel.

Window OpeningBriefly push the window switch once tomove the window downward.

Push the switch a second time toactivate the automatic operation.Pushing the switch a third time will stopthe window in the desired position.Window ClosingPull the window switch up to move thewindow upward. Hold the switch for atleast half of a second and the windowwill go up automatically.To stop the window during Auto-Upoperation, push or pull the windowswitch again.Passenger Side Front Door/RearDoor ControlsThere are single window controls on thepassenger and rear door trim panelswhich operate the door windows.Auto-Up Feature With Anti-PinchProtectionThe vehicle may be equipped with ananti-pinch safety device for closing thewindows.If the safety system senses anyobstacle while the window is closing, itwill stop the window’s movement andreverse it, depending on its position.This device is also useful if the windowsare activated accidentally by childreninside the vehicle.The anti-pinch safety function isactivated both during the manual andthe automatic operation of the window.When the anti-pinch system isactivated, the window closing isimmediately interrupted. Then thewindow closing is automatically

reversed and the window lowers byabout eight inches (20 cm) in relation tothe first stop position. The windowcannot be operated during this time.Note: In the event of an error, or if theanti-pinch protection is activated threeconsecutive times, the automaticclosing operation of the window will bedeactivated. In order to restore thecorrect operation of the system, thewindow must be lowered.Power Window System InitializationIf power supply is interrupted, theelectric window automatic operationmust be initialized once more.The initialization procedure describedbelow must be carried out for eachdoor (with the doors closed):1. Fully close the window to beinitialized, with manual operation.2. After the window has been closed,hold the up switch for at least threeseconds.

Warning!

Never leave children unattended in avehicle, and do not let children play withpower windows. Do not leave the key fobin or near the vehicle, or in a locationaccessible to children. Occupants,particularly unattended children, canbecome entrapped by the windows whileoperating the power window switches.Such entrapment may result in seriousinjury or death.

04166S0001EM

Power Window Switches

1 — Front LeftWindow Switch

4 — WindowLockout Switch

2 — Front RightWindow Switch

5 — Rear LeftWindow Switch

3 — Rear RightWindow Switch

49

POWER SUNROOF —IF EQUIPPEDPower Sunroof

The power sunroof consists of twoglass panels (the front one is power andthe rear one fixed) and is fitted with apower sunshade in the front, as well asa manually operated sunshade in therear.Operation of the sunroof is onlypossible with the ignition at ON. Referto “Ignition” in this chapter for furtherinformation.

Warning!

Never leave children unattended in avehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. Never leave the key fob in or nearthe vehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren. Do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with keyless ignition inthe ON mode. Occupants, particularlyunattended children, can becomeentrapped by the power sunroof whileoperating the power sunroof switch.Such entrapment may result in seriousinjury or death.

In a collision, there is a greater risk ofbeing thrown from a vehicle with an opensunroof. You could also be seriously injuredor killed. Always fasten your seat beltproperly and make sure all passengers arealso properly secured.

Do not allow small children to operatethe sunroof. Never allow your fingers, otherbody parts, or any object, to projectthrough the sunroof opening. Injury mayresult.

Opening

To open the sunroof’s front panel, pushthe open/close button toward the rearof the vehicle to open completely.The automatic motion can beinterrupted in any position by pushingthe open/close button again.

Caution!

Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack orcrossbars are fitted. Do not open the sunroof if there is snow or ice on it: you maydamage it.

Closing

From the complete open position, pushthe open/close button toward the front ofthe vehicle. The roof will close completely.The automatic motion can beinterrupted in any position by pushingthe open/close button again.

Vent Opening

To bring the roof into vent position,push and release the vent button.This type of vent opening can beactivated regardless of the position ofthe sunroof. When starting with the roofin the closed position, pushing the ventbutton automatically causes the sunroofto open to the vent position. If the roofis already open, the button must beheld until the roof reaches thevent-opening position.Pushing vent button again duringautomatic movement of the roof willstop it.

04186S0001EM

Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons

1 — Open/Close Button2 — Vent Open/Close3 — Power Shade Open/Close

50

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Sun Shade Movement

The front sunshade is power operated.Push the Power Shade open/closebutton toward the rear of the vehicle toopen the front sun shade.Push the Power Shade open/closebutton toward the front of the vehicle toclose the sun shade.The automatic motion can beinterrupted in any position by pushingthe Power Shade on/off button again.To open the rear sunshade, pullsunshade manually toward the rear ofthe vehicle.

Pinch Protect Feature

The sunroof has an anti-pinch safetysystem capable of detecting thepresence of an obstacle during theclosing movement. If an obstacle isdetected, the system intervenes andthe movement of the sunroof isimmediately reversed into opening.

Initialization Procedure

Automatic operation of the sunroofmust be initialized again in case of faultysunroof operation. It may also benecessary to initialize the sunroof afterthe vehicle’s battery as beendisconnected and then reconnected.Proceed as follows:

1. Push the open/close button to bringthe roof into the completely closedposition.

2. Cycle the ignition to the STOPposition and wait at least ten seconds.

3. Cycle the ignition to the AVVposition. Refer to “Ignition” in thischapter for further information.

4. Hold the open/close button downfor at least ten seconds. You shouldthen hear the mechanical stop of theroof motor.

5. Within five seconds, hold theopen/close button down. The roof willperform a complete automatic openingand closing cycle (to indicate that theinitialization procedure has beensuccessful). If this does not occur, theprocedure must be restarted from thebeginning.

HOODOpening

To open the hood, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the release lever located on thedriver’s side kick panel.

2. Go to the outside of the vehicle andposition yourself in front of the grille.

3. Lift the hood slightly.

04196S0001EM

Hood Release Lever

51

4. Move the under-hood latch fromright to left to release the hood.

5. Raise the hood completely. Theoperation is assisted by the addition oftwo gas props which hold it in the openposition.

Note:

Do not tamper with the props andassist the hood while lifting it.

Use both hands to lift the hood.Before lifting, check that the windshieldwiper arms are not raised from thewindshield or in operation, that thevehicle is stationary and that theelectric park brake is engaged.

Closing

To close, lower the hood toapproximately 16 inches (40 cm) fromthe engine compartment then let itdrop. Make sure that the hood iscompletely closed and fully latched.Do this by trying to open it. If it is notperfectly closed, do not try to push thehood lid down, but open it and repeatthe procedure.Note: Always check that the hood isclosed correctly to prevent it fromopening while the vehicle is travelling.Since the hood is equipped with adouble locking system, one for eachside, you must check that it is closedon both its side ends.

Warning!

Be sure the hood is fully latched beforedriving your vehicle. If the hood is not fullylatched, it could open when the vehicle isin motion and block your vision. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.

TRUNKThe trunk unlocking is electricallyoperated and is deactivated when thevehicle is in motion.

Opening

Opening From The OutsideWhen unlocked, the trunk lid can beopened from outside the vehicle usingthe exterior trunk lid release buttonlocated between the plate lights. Pushthe button until you hear a “click.” Thetrunk lid can also be opened by quicklypushing the exterior trunk lid releasebutton on the key fob twice.

The turn signal indicators will blink and theinterior lights will turn on when the trunklid is opened. They turn off automaticallywhen the trunk lid is closed.

04196S0002EM

Lift Under Hood Latch Up Then Left

04056S0005EM

Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button

52

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

The lights turn off automatically after afew minutes if the trunk lid is left open.

Opening From The InsideWhen unlocked, the trunk lid can beopened from inside the vehicle usingthe interior trunk lid release button,located under the dashboard near theengine hood opening lever. Push thetrunk lid release button until you hear a“click.”

Trunk Lid Emergency OpeningA lever can be found in the trunk lidover the lock to allow opening from theinside.

Pull the lever in the direction indicatedby the arrow to open the trunk lid. Thelever can be seen in the dark.

Closing

Grip one of the handles and lower thetrunk lid until it clicks.

Note:

It will not be possible to open thetrunk lid with a key or by pushing thebutton in the passenger compartmentwhen the battery is disconnected. So,always position the manual trunk lidopening strap on the trunk lid lockbefore disconnecting the battery. Referto “Storing The Vehicle” in “ServicingAnd Maintenance” for the procedure.

Trunk InitializationNote: If the battery is disconnected orthe protection fuse blows, the trunk lidopening/closing mechanism must bere-initialized as follows:

1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid.

2. Push the lock button on the remotecontrol.

3. Push the unlock button on theremote control.04206S0002EM

Interior Trunk Lid Release Button

04206S0006EM

Emergency Release Button

04206S0003EM

Trunk Lid Interior Handles

53

Luggage CompartmentSpecifications

Access To The Tire Repair KitTo access the Tire Repair Kit, lift thecarpet in the luggage compartment. Forits use, refer to ”Tire Repair Kit” in “InCase Of Emergency” for furtherinformation.

Rear Cargo Tie–Downs —If EquippedThere are four hooks inside the luggagecompartment for attaching the cargonet or cables which can secure thecargo be carried.

Note: Do not apply a load greater than22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook.

Cargo Net — If EquippedThis is useful for correctly arranging thecargo and/or for transporting lightmaterials.The cargo net is available from anauthorized dealer.

INTERNALEQUIPMENTGlove CompartmentTo open the glove compartmentproceed as follows:

1. If equipped with a lock, unlock theglove compartment by placing theemergency key in the lock on thehandle.

2. Pull handle to open the glovecompartment.

When the glove compartment isopened, a light turns on to illuminatethe inside of the compartment.Note: Do not insert large objects thatwill prevent the glove compartmentfrom closing completely. Always makesure that the glove compartment iscompletely closed when driving.

04206S0004EM

Cargo Area

04206S0005EM

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs

04246S0001EM

Opening The Glove Compartment

54

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Sun VisorsThe sun visors are located at the sidesof the interior rear view mirror. They canbe adjusted forward and sideways.To direct the visor toward thepassenger side window, detach thevisor from the interior rear view mirrorside hook and turn it towards the sidewindow.From this position, the sun visor canalso be extended toward to rear of thevehicle for additional blockage ofsunlight.Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted onthe back of the sun visors and can beused even in poor light conditions.

Note: A rear facing child restraintsystem should never be fitted in thefront passenger seat. Always complywith the instructions on the sun visor.Refer to "Child Restraints" in "Safety"for more information.

Homelink — If Equipped

DescriptionHomelink is a fixed system installed onthe vehicle. It can sync up to threedifferent devices that activate garagedoors, gates, lighting systems, andhome or office alarm systems.

Programming

Warning!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbonmonoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not runyour vehicle in the garage whileprogramming the transceiver. Exhaust gascan cause serious injury or death.

Your motorized door or gate will openand close while you are programming theuniversal transceiver. Do not program thetransceiver if people, pets or other objectsare in the path of the door or gate. Onlyuse this transceiver with a garage dooropener that has a “stop and reverse”feature as required by Federal safetystandards. This includes most garage dooropener models manufactured after 1982.Do not use a garage door opener withoutthese safety features. Call toll-free1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet atHomeLink.com for safety information orassistance.

Note: Without starting the engine,activate the handbrake and place theignition in the ON position.

The following operation will delete themanufacture’s standard codes anddoes not need to be repeated duringthe subsequent button programming:

Push and hold the outer buttons(1 and 3). After about ten seconds, thelighted indicators will start to flash.Release both buttons.

Note: Follow the steps below to beginprogramming your remote control toone of the HomeLink buttons:

1. Push and hold the desiredHomeLink button (1, 2 or 3).When the HomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly, move the portable remote

04246S0002EM

Rotate Sun Visor TowardPassenger Window

04246S0006NA

Garage Door Opener (Homelink)Buttons

1 — Homelink Button 12 — Homelink Button 23 — Homelink Button 34 — Homelink Indicator

55

control one to three inches from theHomeLink system (keeping theprogrammable button pushed down).

2. If the indicator does not begin toflash quickly, change the distancebetween the HomeLink and theportable remote control and try theprocedure again.

3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, firstslowly and then quickly. When theindicator starts to flash quickly, releaseboth buttons.

Using The Homelink SystemThe HomeLink system activates thegarage door or gate motor, just like theportable remote control. The car mustbe within the range of the garage doorand the ignition must be in the ONposition.Push the programmed button (1, 2 or3). While the signal is being transmitted,the indicator is lit and the system(garage door, gate, etc.) will respond.If the HomeLink system does notoperate, the original portable remotecontrol may be equipped with analternative code (refer to “AlternativeCode Synchronization”).If necessary, the original remote controlcan still be used to operate the system.

Alternative Code SynchronizationTo check whether the garage door orgate motor has an alternative code,proceed as follows:

1. Read the garage door or gate motormanufacturer manual.

2. The portable remote control seemsto have programmed to the HomeLinksystem, but the garage door or gatecan be neither opened or closed.

3. Push the programmed button andkeep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With analternative code system, the indicatorflashes briefly, and then remains off fortwo seconds. This sequence isrepeated for 20 seconds.

Warning!


Your motorized door or gate will openand close while you are programming theuniversal transceiver. Do not program thetransceiver if people, pets or other objectsare in the path of the door or gate. Onlyuse this transceiver with a garage dooropener that has a “stop and reverse”feature as required by Federal safetystandards. This includes most garage dooropener models manufactured after 1982.

Do not use a garage door opener withoutthese safety features. Call toll-free1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet atHomeLink.com for safety information orassistance.

Note: To program Homelink using anAlternative Code, the car must bewithin range of the garage door.Activate the handbrake and turn theignition to ON, without starting theengine.Proceed as follows:

1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” buttonon the garage door or gate motor. Thecolor and position may vary dependingon the manufacturer (consult thegarage door or gate manual). Push the“Learn” or “Train” button (this normallyactivates the setting warning light).

2. Push the desired HomeLink button(1, 2 or 3). When the HomeLinkindicator begins to flash slowly, movethe portable remote control one to threeinches from the HomeLink system(keeping the programmable buttonpushed down).

3. Within 30 seconds, push theprogrammed key (1, 2 or 3) and releaseit. Push the programmed button asecond time and release it to concludethe operation. For some motors, theoperation will probably have to berepeated a third time to end the setting.

56

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

The motor should now be capable ofrecognizing the signal transmitted byHomeLink and then open/close thedoor or gate.

Programming A Single KeyIt is possible to program another originalremote control on an alreadyprogrammed HomeLink key by cancelingthe previously stored frequency.

Warning!


Your motorized door or gate will openand close while you are programming theuniversal transceiver. Do not program thetransceiver if people, pets or other objectsare in the path of the door or gate. Onlyuse this transceiver with a garage dooropener that has a “stop and reverse”feature as required by Federal safetystandards. This includes most garage dooropener models manufactured after 1982.Do not use a garage door opener withoutthese safety features. Call toll-free1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet atHomeLink.com for safety information orassistance.

Note: Activate the handbrake andplace the ignition to ON without startingthe engine.

Proceed as follows:

1. Push the desired HomeLink buttonand keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do notrelease the button until the lastoperation has been performed.

2. When the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, move theportable remote control 1 to 3 inchesfrom the system (keeping theprogrammable button pressed down).If the indicator does not begin to flashquickly, change the distance betweenthe HomeLink and the portable remotecontrol and try the procedure again.

The HomeLink indicator flashes, firstslowly and then quickly. When theindicator starts to flash quickly, releaseboth buttons on the remote control.The system previously programmed toHomeLink has now been deleted andthe new system is ready to use. Thisdoes not affect the other two HomeLinkbuttons in any way.

Deleting Programmed KeysIt is recommended to delete HomeLinkprogramming before selling the car.All three keys are deletedsimultaneously.Proceed as follows:1. Push and hold the outer buttons(1 and 3). After about ten seconds, theindicator will start to flash.

2. Release both keys.

Technical Information For AfterSales ServiceIf you are unable to set up HomeLinksuccessfully after following the aboveinstructions, contact After Sales Service(HomeLink free hotline number1-800-355-3515 ) with the followinginformation:

Vehicle make and model, includingmanufacturing year and country ofpurchase;

Make, model, age and frequency ofuse of the original portable remotecontrol (if known).General InformationThe following regulatory statementapplies to all Radio Frequency (RF)devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



57

Center Console

The center console storagecompartment is located between thefront seats.To access the center console storage,lift the upper part of the center consoleas shown below.

Warning!

Do not operate this vehicle with a consolecompartment lid in the open position.Driving with the console compartment lidopen may result in injury in a collision.

CupholderTwo cupholders are available in thecenter console.

To access the cupholders, slide thecover forward. To close thecompartment, push the cover and it willclose automatically.

ENVIRONMENTALPROTECTIONSYSTEMSThe following systems are used forreducing engine emissions:

Catalytic Converter

Oxygen Sensors

Evaporation Control System

04246S0004EM

Center Console

04246S0005EM

Cupholders In Center Console

1— Cover

58

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

ACTIVEAERODYNAMICSFront Mobile Spoiler(Alfa Active Aero)This is an automatic device, working atthe vehicle speed, which allows higherreactivity at average speeds and highervehicle stability at high speeds,regulating the air flow into the lower partof the vehicle.Note: The system is not active intemperatures near or below zero, orwhen the Alfa DNA selector is in the"Natural" or "Advanced Efficiency"positions.

If there is a fault, a generic failure iconwill light up on the instrument paneldisplay, along with a message that willidentify the type of malfunction. Seeyour authorized dealer if a fault occurs.

04296S0001EM

Front Fascia

59

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all theinformation you need to understandand use the instrument panel correctly.

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .61INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . .63WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . .68ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . .90

60

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURESInstrument Cluster

1. Tachometer

2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light

3. Instrument Cluster Display

4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle On The Left Side Of The Symbol Indicates The Fuel Door Location)

5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)

05026S0005EM

Instrument Cluster

61

Tachometer

The Tachometer indicates the engineRevolutions Per Minute (RPM).

Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting(Brightness Sensor)Inside the Tachometer there is a lightsensor capable of detecting light andadjusting the brightness of theinstrument panel and the Informationand Entertainment System display.

Engine Oil TemperatureGauge

The digital indicator monitors thetemperature of the engine oil and startssupplying indications when the oiltemperature reaches approximately122° F (50°C).Under normal usage, the temperatureshould remain around the middle of thedigital scale according to the workingconditions.The warning light will turn on tosignal the excessive increase of theengine oil temperature.In the event of excessive engine oiltemperature, stop the engineimmediately and contact an authorizeddealer.

Fuel Level Gauge

The digital fuel gauge monitors theamount of fuel in the tank.When the warning light turns on, amessage is displayed, and a chime issound when 2.38 Gallons (9.0 L) of fuelare left in the tank.Note: If the low fuel warning light turnson, refuel the vehicle at your nearestfuel station.

Caution!

Do not travel with the fuel tank almostempty: any gaps in fuel supply coulddamage the catalytic converter.

Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in miles per hour and/orkilometers per hour (mph/km/h).

62

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAYInstrument Cluster Display Description

This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster willdisplay the vehicle mileage for a few seconds.

Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display

During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings and failureindications.

05036S0001QV

Instrument Cluster Display

63

Reconfigurable DisplayItems

1. Headlight Warning Lights

Displays the headlight warning light foreither of the following active modes:

Headlights

Automatic Headlights

2. Gear Selector Information

Displays the following informationcontrolled by the gear selector function:

P = PARK

R = REVERSE

N = NEUTRAL

D = DRIVE, (automatic forwardspeed)

AutoStick: + shifting to higher gearin manual (sequential) driving mode –shifting to lower gear in sequentialdriving mode

3. Forward Collision, LaneDeparture, Cruise Control

Displays operations for the followingmodes:

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Cruise Control (CC) or Active CruiseControl (ACC) (if equipped)

4. Speed Limit Warning Light

Shows information regarding the SpeedLimiter function.

5. Compass

6. Reconfigurable Main Area

Can display the following screens:

Home

Trip A

Trip B (can be activated/deactivatedthrough the Information andEntertainment System)

Performance

The screens can be selected, onrotation, by pushing the MENUselection button on the windshieldwiper stalk.

Depending on the driving mode chosenusing the Alfa DNA (Dynamic, Natural,and Advanced Efficiency, the screenscan be graphically different. Navigationinstructions and call information can beset and displayed in the Information andEntertainment System.

Home

The parameters shown on the display,for the modes: Dynamic, Natural andAdvanced Efficiency are:

Time

Outside Temperature

Current Speed (shown if the repeatmodes of the Phone and Navigationfunctions are not active)

Range

05036S0002EM

MENU Selection Button05036S0004NA


64

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Trip A And B

For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural,and Advanced Efficiency) and with theignition device ON, the "Trip computer"can be used to display themeasurements regarding the operatingstate of the vehicle. This function ischaracterized by two separate records,called “Trip A” and “Trip B” (the latter canbe deactivated by Information andEntertainment System), where the“complete missions” (journeys) arerecorded in a reciprocally independentmanner.

“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to displaythe values relating to:

Distance travelled

Average fuel consumption

Average speed

Active trip

Fuel consumption indicator

To reset the values, press and holddown the button on the windshieldwiper stalk.

Performance

The displayed parameters differaccording to the active mode. Themodes which can be selected using theAlfa DNA system are:

Natural

The screen graphically reproducessome parameters closely linked to theefficiency of the driving style, with aview to limiting consumption.

05036S0055NA

Instrument Cluster Display05036S0007NA


05036S0002EM

Reset Button

05036S0009NA

Efficiency Consumption Graph

65

Advanced Efficiency

The three central icons on the screenindicate the effectiveness of the drivingstyle, linked to the followingparameters: acceleration, decelerationand gear shifts, with a view to limitingconsumption. The bar below the iconsshows current consumption and thegreen line represents the optimal area.The globe lights up gradually accordingto lower consumption.

Dynamic

The displayed parameters are related tovehicle stability, the graphs illustrate thetrend of the longitudinal/lateralaccelerations (G-meter information),considering gravity acceleration as areference unit.

Lateral acceleration peaks are alsoindicated.

The displayed parameters are related tovehicle stability, the graphs illustrate thetrend of the longitudinal/lateralaccelerations (G-meter information),considering gravity acceleration as areference unit.

Lateral acceleration peaks are alsoindicated.

7. Vehicle RangeIndicates the miles left before the fueltank is empty.

Displays the position by indicating thecardinal direction.

8. Failure Warning LightsArea dedicated to displaying failures,the following symbols could bedisplayed on rotation:

Low criticality symbols (yellow amber)

High criticality symbols (red)

9. Odometer

Indicates the total miles travelled.

U.S. Federal regulations require thatupon transfer of vehicle ownership, theseller certify to the purchaser thecorrect mileage that the vehicle hasbeen driven. If your odometer needs tobe repaired or serviced, the repairtechnician should leave the odometerreading the same as it was before therepair or service. If s/he cannot do so,

05036S0011NA

Dynamic Driving Style

05036S0013NA

Acceleration Gauge

05036S0014NA

Acceleration Stability Gauge

66

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

then the odometer must be set at zero,and a sticker must be placed in thedoor jamb stating what the mileage wasbefore the repair or service. It is a goodidea for you to make a record of theodometer reading before therepair/service, so that you can be surethat it is properly reset, or that the doorjamb sticker is accurate if the odometermust be reset at zero.

PARAMETERS SET BY USER

Multiple settings can be programmedby the user using the Information andEntertainment System. This sectiondescribes only the basic settings:

Units & Language

Time & Date

Cluster

To access the settings list in theInformation and Entertainment System,proceed as follows:1. Press the MENU button to access

the main menu.Select “Settings” from he main menuusing the Rotary Knob.

Units & Language

The following settings can be modifiedunder the “Units & Language” menu:

Measure Units: select US, metric, orcustom. The custom option allows forindividual selection of the unit measures

Language: change the language ofthe system

Restore Settings: restores the factorysettings

To access and the change the setting,turn and push the Rotary Pad.

Clock & Date

The following settings can be modifiedunder the “Clock & Date” menu:

Sync With GPS Time: activates ordeactivates the clock synchronizationthrough the GPS. If the function isdeactivated, the options Set Time andSet Date are enabled

05036S0015EM

Information And EntertainmentSystem

05036S0040EM

MENU button

05036S0016EM

Units & Language Selectable MenuOptions

05036S0017EM

Clock & Date Selectable MenuOptions

67

Set Time: set the time manually

Time Format: set the time format toeither a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock)

Set Date: set the date manually



Cluster

The following settings can be modifiedunder the “Cluster” menu:

Warning buzzer volume: set thevolume of the warning buzzer

Trip B: activate or deactivate the Tripfunction

Phone repeat: activate or deactivaterepeating the Phone function screenson the instrument cluster display



WARNING LIGHTSAND MESSAGES ONTHE INSTRUMENTPANELThe following pages consist of warninglights and messages.

Note:

The warning light turns on togetherwith a dedicated message and/orchime when applicable. Theseindications are precautionary and assuch must not be considered asexhaustive and/or alternative to theinformation contained in the Owner’sManual, which you are advised to readcarefully in all cases. Always refer tothe information in this section in theevent of a failure indication.

The failure indicators appearing onthe display are divided into twocategories: very serious and lessserious faults. Serious faults areindicated by a repeated and prolongedwarning "cycle.” Less serious faults areindicated by a warning "cycle" with ashorter duration. You can stop thewarning cycle in both cases bypushing the button located on thewindshield wiper stalk. The instrumentpanel warning light will stay on until thecause of the failure is eliminated.

05036S0018EM

Instrument Cluster DisplaySelectable Menu Options

68

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKEONThis light monitors various brake functions, includingbrake fluid level and parking brake application. If thebrake light turns on it may indicate that the parkingbrake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or thatthere is a problem with the anti-lock brake systemreservoir.If the light remains on when the parking brake has beendisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on themaster cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brakehydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with theBrake Booster has been detected by the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system. In this case, the light will remain on until thecondition has been corrected. If the problem is relatedto the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will run whenapplying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may befelt during each stop.

For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer tohave the system checked as soon as possible.Release the electric park brake, then check that thewarning light has turned off.If the warning light stays on, contact an authorizeddealer.

ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD)FAILUREThe simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and

(amber) warning lights with the engine on indicateseither a failure of the EBD system or that the system isnot available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenlylock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer tohave the system inspected immediately.

69


AIR BAG WARNING LIGHTThis light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulbcheck when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUNposition. If the light is either not on during startup, stayson, or turns on while driving, have the system inspectedat an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This lightwill illuminate with a single chime when a fault with theAir Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay onuntil the fault is cleared. If the light comes onintermittently or remains on while driving, have anauthorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING LIGHTWhen the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position,if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will soundand the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver orfront passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the SeatBelt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuouslyand a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”in “Safety” for further information.

Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle.

OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHTThis telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may notindicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on thedisplay), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in alower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

70

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Amber Warning Lights

WarningLight What It Means What To Do

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHTThis light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Thelight will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUNposition and may stay on for as long as four seconds.If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then theAnti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning andservice is required. However, the conventional brake systemwill continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light isnot on.If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced assoon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes.If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed inthe ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by anauthorized dealer.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon aspossible.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHTThe warning light switches on and a message is displayed toindicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommendedvalue and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In thesecases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not beguaranteed.Should one or more tires be in the condition mentionedabove, the display will show the indications corresponding toeach tire in sequence.

Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed nohigher then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealerto have the tire repaired.

71

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible andinflate them to the proper pressure.Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handlingand stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thetelltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists. Whenthe malfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detect orsignal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternatetires or wheels on the vehicle thatprevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle,to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function properly.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for theoriginal equipment tires and wheels.TPMS pressures and warning have beenestablished for the tire size equipped onyour vehicle. Undesirable system operationor sensor damage may result when usingreplacement equipment that is not of thesame size, type, and/or style. Aftermarketwheels can cause sensor damage. Usingaftermarket tire sealants may cause theTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)sensor to become inoperable. After usingan aftermarket tire sealant it isrecommended that you take your vehicleto an authorized dealership to have yoursensor function checked.

72

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


Tire Pressure LowThe indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tirepressure is lower than the recommended value and/orthat slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not beguaranteed.

In any situation in which the message on the display is"See Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “AuxiliaryDriving Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with theindications that you find there.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATORLIGHTWhen the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator lightilluminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine isstarted.ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the systemis indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: itindicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and gripconditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turnoff, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure wasfound in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as

possible.Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of theindicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.

73


ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFFINDICATOR LIGHT — IF EQUIPPEDWhen the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator lightilluminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine isstarted.The indicator light illuminates to indicate that someactive safety systems have been partially or totallydeactivated.For further details about the active safety systems, refer to“Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the activesafety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off.

REAR FOG LIGHTThe indicator illuminates when the rear fog light isactivated.

ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL)In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON,the indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off assoon as the engine is started.The operation of the indicator light may be checked by thetraffic police using specific devices. Comply with the lawsand regulations of the country where you are driving.

Under these conditions, the vehicle can continuetravelling at moderate speed but without demandingexcessive effort from the engine or high speed.Prolonged use of the vehicle with the indicator light onconstantly may cause damage. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versionstogether with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

74

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) —IF EQUIPPEDThis indicator light informs the driver that the frontalcollision alarm function is not enabled.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soonas possible.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGEThe indicator light (or the symbol in the display)illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is leftin the tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.

75

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To Do

PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHTThis indicator will illuminate when the park lights orheadlights are turned on.

Headlight Off DelayThis function allows the headlights to remain on for 30,60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in theSTOP position.

LEFT TURN SIGNALThe instrument cluster directional arrow will flashindependently for the left turn signal as selected, as wellas the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) asselected when the multifunction lever is moved down(left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction withthe right directional arrow when the hazard warning lightbutton is pushed.

RIGHT TURN SIGNALThe instrument cluster directional arrow will flashindependently for the right turn signal as selected, aswell as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) asselected when the multifunction lever is moved up(right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunctionwith the left directional arrow when the hazard warninglight button is pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS(On Base Instrument Cluster Display)This indicator light will illuminate when the automatichigh beam headlights are activated.

76

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Indicator Light What It Means What To Do

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (On Base Instrument ClusterDisplay)This indicator shows that the high beam headlights areon. Push the multifunction control lever away from youto switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever asecond time to switch the headlights back to low beam.Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,“flash to pass” scenario.

77

Red Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSUREThis telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If thetelltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shutoff the engine as soon as possible. A chime will soundwhen this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicleuntil the cause is corrected. This telltale does notindicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oillevel must be checked under the hood.

Note:Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved.The turning on of the telltale does not indicate theamount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checkedon the display upon entering the vehicle and also byactivating the "Oil level" function on the Information andEntertainment System.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

78

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGHThe telltale lights up when the engine has overheated.

In normal driving conditions: stop the car, turn off theengine and check that the coolant level in the reservoiris not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for theengine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open thecap, fill with coolant and check that the level is betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Alsocheck visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorizeddealer if the telltale comes on when the engine is startedagain.If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions

(e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down and, if thewarning light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for 2 or3 minutes with the engine running and slightlyaccelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, thenturn the engine off. Check that the coolant level iscorrect as described above.

POWER STEERING FAILUREIf the telltale remains on, you could not have steeringassistance and the effort required to operate the steeringwheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible.

Note:

After the battery is disconnected, the steering wheelmust be initialized. The Power Steering Failure light onthe instrument panel will illuminate to indicate this. Tocarry out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheelall the way from one end to the other, and then turn inback to the central position.


79


DOOR OPENThe telltale turns on when one or more doors are notcompletely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with thedoors open and the car moving.

Close the doors properly.

HOOD CAP NOT PROPERLY SHUTThe telltale turns on when the hood cap is not properlyclosed, along with the icon, an image of the vehiclewith an open hood cap appears on the display.A buzzer is heard when the hood cap is open and thevehicle is moving.

Close the hood properly.

TRUNK LID NOT PROPERLY SHUTThe telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properlyclosed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle withan open trunk lid appears on the display.A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and thevehicle is moving.

Close the trunk lid properly.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILUREThe telltale turns on, together with a buzzer warning, toindicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.


Caution!Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severelydamage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oilmay also overheat: contact with hot engine or withexhaust components at high temperature could causefires.

80

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNINGLIGHTSThis warning light, along with the related message,signals a failure in the electronic throttle control system(ETC).


If a failure is detected, the warning light turns on whilethe engine is running.

Place the gear selector in the P (Park) position and theignition in the off position: the warning light shouldswitch off. If the warning light stays on with enginerunning, the vehicle can still be driven.Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

If the warning light flashes with the engine running,immediate intervention is required. A loss ofperformance, irregular/high idling speed or enginestopping might take place and the vehicle may need tobe towed.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL LEVELThe telltale turns on, along with the related message onthe display, to indicate low engine oil level.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the systemchecked.

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILUREThe switching on of the telltale signals a failure in theautomatic steering correction system.


ALTERNATOR FAILUREThe switching on of the telltale with engine oncorresponds to an alternator failure.


81

Amber Symbols


ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System FailureThe telltale will illuminate to report a failure of theEngine Immobilizer system.


Break-In AttemptThe telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled toON position, to indicate a possible break-in attemptdetected by the alarm system.

Electronic Key Not RecognizedThe telltale will illuminate when the engine is started andthe electronic key is not recognized by the system.

Alarm System FailureThe telltale will illuminate to report an alarm systemfailure.

FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHTThe telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurredand the system has shut the fuel off.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to“Enhanced Accident Response System” in “OccupantRestraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information.If it is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact anauthorized dealer.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate when the system has failed oris not available.


82

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


POSSIBLE ICE ON ROADThe telltale will illuminate when the outside temperaturefalls to or below 37°F (3°C).

ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPEDThe telltale is illuminated only for a limited time.

Note:After the first indication, each time the engine is startedthe symbol will continue to illuminate as describedabove until the oil is changed.If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is afault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is nownecessary to change the oil as a result of regular use ofthe vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is acceleratedby using the vehicle for short drives, preventing theengine from reaching operating temperature.


Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) afterit first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

83


ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oilpressure sensor failure.


ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil levelsensor failure.


FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEMFAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of theForward Collision Warning system.


START/STOP SYSTEM FAILUREThis telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start systemfailure.


RAIN SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of theautomatic windshield wiper.


DUSK SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of theautomatic low beam alignment.


BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind SpotMonitoring system failure.


FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensorfailure.


84

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on thefollowing lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parkinglights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailerlights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators /rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / licenseplate lights.

The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blownprotection fuse, or an interruption of the electricalconnection.Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact anauthorized dealer.

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless systemfailure.


FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-offsystem failure.


LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEMFAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in theLane Departure Warning system.


AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE —IF EQUIPPEDThe telltale will illuminate to report a failure of theautomatic high beam headlights.


85


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATINGThe telltale will illuminate in the case of transmissionoverheating, after a particularly demanding use. In thiscase an engine performance limitation is carried out.

Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off oridling.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audiosystem.


SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILUREWhile driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a SpeedLimiter system failure.


LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAPLights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properlyclosed.

Tighten the cap properly.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate and a message will display tosignal a failure in the electric park brake system.This failure may partially or completely block the vehiclebecause the park brake could remain activated even ifautomatically or manually disengaged using the relevantcontrols. In these circumstances, you can disengagethe park brake following the emergency disengagementprocedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.”

If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is notengaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer andremember, when executing any maneuvers/commands,that the electric park brake is not operational.

Warning!

If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.

86

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL


LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPEDThis telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehiclecoolant level is low.

Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.”

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMThis light will illuminate when the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) is not operating and needs service.


WEAR ON BRAKE PADSThis light will illuminate when the brake pads havereached their wear limit.


Note:Always use genuine parts or similar because theIntegrated Brake System (IBS) system could detectanomalies.

WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS — IF EQUIPPEDThis light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brakediscs have reached their wear limit.


Warning!It is recommended to use only original or equivalent,bench-tested spare pads in order to ensure the originalperformance of the braking system.

87


DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in thedynamic drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURESignals a windshield wiper failure.

Contact an authorized dealer.

GENERIC INDICATIONSignals information and failures.The accompanying messages describe the failure.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILUREThis telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drivesystem failure.


AFS SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to indicate the automaticdirectional light system failure.

Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION —IF EQUIPPEDThe telltale will illuminate when the most comfortablesuspension setting is activated.

SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC) — IF EQUIPPEDWhile driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failurein the suspension system.


WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVELThe telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of thewindshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.

To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in“Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with thefeatures indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” sectionin “Technical Specifications.”

88

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Green Symbols

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTSThe telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTSThe symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

START/STOP OPERATIONThe telltale will illuminate in the case of Start/Stop system intervention (stopping the engine).When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start” in “Starting AndOperating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATEDThe telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMThe symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTSThe telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTSThe telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

89

ONBOARDDIAGNOSTICSYSTEMOperationThe OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system)carries out a continuous diagnosis ofthe components of the vehicle relatedto emissions.It also alerts the driver of when thesecomponents are no longer in peakcondition by switching on the

warning light on the instrumentpanel (see “Warning Lights AndMessages” paragraph in this chapter).The aim of the OBD system (OnboardDiagnostic) is to:

Monitor the efficiency of the systemIndicate an increase in emissionsIndicate the need to replace

damaged componentsThe vehicle also has a connector, whichcan interface with appropriate tools,that makes it possible to read the errorcodes stored in the electronic controlunits together with a series of specificparameters for engine operation anddiagnosis. This check can be carriedout by your authorized dealer.Note: After eliminating a fault, to checkthe system completely, your authorizeddealer is obliged to run tests and, ifnecessary certain road tests.

Onboard DiagnosticSystem (OBD II)Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have anOnboard Diagnostic system (OBD II)and a connection port to allowaccess to information related to theperformance of your emissionscontrols. Authorized service techniciansmay need to access this information toassist with the diagnosis and service ofyour vehicle and emissions system.

Warning!

ONLY an authorized service technicianshould connect equipment to the OBD IIconnection port in order to diagnose orservice your vehicle.

If unauthorized equipment is connectedto the OBD II connection port, such as adriver-behavior tracking device, it may:

Be possible that vehicle systems,including safety related systems, could beimpaired or a loss of vehicle control couldoccur that may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

Access, or allow others to access,information stored in your vehicle systems,including personal information.

90

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

SAFETY

This very important section describesthe safety systems that your vehiclemay be equipped with, and providesinstructions on how to use themcorrectly.

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS . . . . . .92AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS. . . .95OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

91

ACTIVE SAFETYSYSTEMSThe vehicle may be equipped with thefollowing active safety devices:

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) SystemDrive Train Control (DTC) SystemElectronic Stability Control (ESC)

SystemTraction Control System (TCS)Panic Brake Assist (PBA) SystemHill Start Assist (HSA) SystemDynamic Steering Torque (DST)

SystemFor the operation of the systems, seethe following pages.

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS)SystemAn integral part of the braking system,the ABS prevents one or more wheelsfrom locking and slipping in all roadsurface conditions, regardless of theintensity of the braking action. Thesystem ensures that the vehicle can becontrolled even during emergencybraking, allowing the driver to optimizestopping distances.The system intervenes during brakingwhen the wheels are about to lock,typically in emergency braking orlow-grip conditions where locking maybe more frequent.

The system also improves control andstability of the vehicle when braking ona surface where the grip of the left andright wheels varies, such as in a corner.The Electronic Braking ForceDistribution (EBD) system works withthe ABS, allowing the brake force to bedistributed between the front and rearwheels.

System InterventionThe ABS equipped on this vehicle isprovided with the "Brake-by-wire"(Integrated Brake System - IBS)function. With this system, thecommand given by pressing the brakepedal is not transmitted hydraulically,but electrically. Therefore, the lightpulsation that is felt on the pedal withthe traditional system is no longernoticeable.

Warning!

The ABS contains sophisticated electronicequipment that may be susceptible tointerference caused by improperly installedor high output radio transmitting equipment.This interference can cause possible loss ofanti-lock braking capability. Installation ofsuch equipment should be performed byqualified professionals.

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes willdiminish their effectiveness and may lead toa collision. Pumping makes the stopping

distance longer. Just press firmly on yourbrake pedal when you need to slow downor stop.

The ABS cannot prevent the naturallaws of physics from acting on the vehicle,nor can it increase braking or steeringefficiency beyond that afforded by thecondition of the vehicle brakes and tires orthe traction afforded.

The ABS cannot prevent collisions,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, following another vehicletoo closely, or hydroplaning.

The capabilities of an ABS equippedvehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner that couldjeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.

Drive Train Control(DTC) System —If EquippedSome models of this vehicle areequipped with an All-Wheel Drivesystem (AWD), which offers an optimaldrive for countless driving conditionsand road surfaces. The system reducesthe slipping of the tires to a minimum,automatically redistributing the torqueto the front and rear wheels as needed.To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle withAWD automatically passes to rear-wheeldrive (RWD) when the road andenvironmental conditions are such thatthey wouldn't cause the tires to slip.

92

SA

FETY

When the road and environmentalconditions require better traction, thevehicle automatically goes to AWDmode.The driving mode, RWD or AWD, isshown on the instrument cluster display.Note: If the system failure symbolswitches on, after starting the engine orwhile driving, it means that the AWDsystem is not working properly. If thewarning message activates frequently, itis recommended to carry out themaintenance operations.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) SystemThe ESC system improves thedirectional control and stability of thevehicle in various driving conditions.The ESC system corrects the vehicle’sundersteer and oversteer, distributingthe brake force on the appropriatewheels. The torque supplied by theengine can also be reduced in order tomaintain control of the vehicle.The ESC system uses sensors installedon the vehicle to determine the paththat the driver intends to follow andcompares it with the vehicle’s effectivepath. When the real path deviates fromthe desired path, the ESC systemintervenes to counter the vehicle’sundersteer or oversteer.

Oversteer occurs when the vehicle isturning more than it should accordingto the angle of the steering wheel.

Understeer occurs when the vehicleis turning less than it should accordingto the angle of the steering wheel.

System InterventionThe intervention of the system isindicated by the flashing of the ESCwarning light on the instrument panel,to inform the driver that the vehiclestability and grip are critical.

Warning!

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increasethe traction afforded by prevailing roadconditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, driving on very slipperysurfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannotprevent accidents resulting from loss ofvehicle control due to inappropriate driverinput for the conditions. Only a safe,attentive, and skillful driver can preventaccidents. The capabilities of an ESCequipped vehicle must never be exploitedin a reckless or dangerous manner whichcould jeopardize the user’s safety or thesafety of others.

Vehicle modifications, or failure toproperly maintain your vehicle, may changethe handling characteristics of your vehicle,and may negatively affect the performanceof the ESC system. Changes to thesteering system, suspension, braking

system, tire type and size or wheel sizemay adversely affect ESC performance.Improperly inflated and unevenly worntires may also degrade ESC performance.Any vehicle modification or poor vehiclemaintenance that reduces the effectivenessof the ESC system can increase the risk ofloss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury and death.

Traction Control System(TCS)The system automatically operates inthe event of slipping, loss of grip on wetroads (hydroplaning), and accelerationon one or both drive wheels on roadsthat are slippery, snowy, icy, etc.Depending on the slipping conditions,two different control systems areactivated:

If the slipping involves both drivewheels, the system intervenes, reducingthe power transmitted by the engine.

If the slipping only involves one of thedrive wheels, the Brake LimitedDifferential (BLD) function is activated,automatically braking the wheel whichis slipping (the behavior of a self-lockingdifferential is simulated). This willincrease the engine torque transferredto the wheel which isn't slipping.

93

System InterventionThe intervention of the system isindicated by the flashing of the ESCwarning light on the instrument panel,to inform the driver that the vehiclestability and grip are critical.

Panic Brake Assist(PBA) SystemThe PBA system is designed to improvethe vehicle’s braking capacity duringemergency braking.The system detects emergency brakingby monitoring the speed and force withwhich the brake pedal is pressed, andconsequently applies the optimal brakepressure. This can reduce the brakingdistance: the PBA system thereforecomplements the ABS.Maximum assistance from the PBAsystem is obtained by pressing thebrake pedal very quickly. In addition, thebrake pedal should be pressedcontinuously during braking, avoidingintermittent presses, to get the mostout of the system. Do not reducepressure on the brake pedal untilbraking is no longer necessary.The PBA system is deactivated whenthe brake pedal is released.

Warning!

The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increasethe traction afforded by prevailing roadconditions. PBA cannot prevent collisions,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, driving on very slipperysurfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilitiesof a PBA-equipped vehicle must never beexploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner, which could jeopardize the user'ssafety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)SystemThis is an integral part of the ESCsystem and facilitates starting onslopes, activating automatically in thefollowing cases:

Uphill: vehicle stationary on a roadwith a gradient higher than 5%, enginerunning, brake pressed andtransmission in NEUTRAL (N) or gearother than REVERSE (R) engaged.

Downhill: vehicle stationary on a roadwith a gradient higher than 5%, enginerunning, brake pressed and reversegear engaged.

When setting off, the ESC systemcontrol unit maintains the brakingpressure on the wheels until the enginetorque necessary for starting isreached, or in any case for a maximumof two seconds, allowing your right footto be moved easily from the brakepedal to the accelerator.The system will automatically deactivateafter two seconds without starting,gradually releasing the brakingpressure. During this release stage, it ispossible to hear a typical mechanicalbrake release noise, indicating theimminent movement of the vehicle.

Warning!

There may be situations where the HillStart Assist (HSA) will not activate andslight rolling may occur, such as on minorhills or with a loaded vehicle, or whilepulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute foractive driving involvement. It is always thedriver’s responsibility to be attentive todistance to other vehicles, people, andobjects, and most importantly brakeoperation to ensure safe operation of thevehicle under all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention is always required whiledriving to maintain safe control of yourvehicle. Failure to follow these warningscan result in a collision or serious personalinjury.

94

SA

FETY

Dynamic SteeringTorque (DST) SystemThe DST function uses the integrationof the ESC system with the electricpower steering to increase the safetylevel of the whole vehicle.In critical situations (braking on surfaceswith different grip conditions), the ESCsystem controls the steering throughthe DST function to implement anadditional torque contribution on thesteering wheel in order to suggest themost correct maneuver to the driver.The coordinated action of the brakesand steering increases the sensation ofsafety and control of the vehicle.Note: The DST feature is only meant tohelp the driver realize the correct courseof action through small torques on thesteering wheel, which means theeffectiveness of the DST feature ishighly dependent on the driver’ssensitivity and overall reaction to theapplied torque. It is very important torealize that this feature will not steer thevehicle, meaning the driver is stillresponsible for steering the vehicle.

AUXILIARY DRIVINGSYSTEMSThe following auxiliary driving systemsare available in this vehicle:

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

Blind Spot Monitoring(BSM) System

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) systemuses two radar sensors, located in therear bumper (one for each side), todetect the presence of other vehicles inthe rear side blind spots of your vehicle.

The system warns the driver aboutthe presence of other vehicles in thedetection area by illuminating the

warning light located within the doormirror on the side in which the othervehicle was detected.

When the engine is started the warninglight turns on to signal the driver thatthe system is active.

SensorsThe sensors are activated when anyforward gear is engaged at a speedhigher than approximately 6 mph(10 km/h) or when REVERSE is engaged.The sensors are temporarily deactivatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and inPARK (P).The detection area of the system coversapproximately a lane on both sides of thevehicle which is around 9 ft (3 m).This area begins from the door mirrorand extends for approximately 19 ft (6 m)towards the rear part of the vehicle.

06016S0001EM

Rear Sensor Location

06016S0002EM

BSM Indicator Light

95

When the sensors are active, thesystem monitors the detection areas onboth sides of the vehicle and warns thedriver about the possible presence ofvehicles in these areas.While driving, the system monitors thedetection area from three different inputpoints (side, rear and front) to checkwhether an alert needs to be sent to thedriver. The system can detect thepresence of a vehicle in one of thesethree areas.

Note:

The system does not alert the driverfor the presence of fixed object (e.g.safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.).However, in some circumstances, thesystem may activate in the presence ofthese objects. This is normal and doesnot indicate a system malfunction.

The system does not alert the driverabout the presence of vehicles comingfrom the opposite direction, in theadjacent lanes.

Warning!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is onlyan aid to help detect objects in the blindspot zones. The BSM system is notdesigned to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals. Even if your vehicle is equippedwith the BSM system, always check your

vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use your turn signal beforechanging lanes. Failure to do so can resultin serious injury or death.

Note:

For the system to operate correctly,the rear bumper area where the radarsensors are located must stay freefrom snow, ice and dirt gathered fromthe road surface.

Do not cover the rear bumper areawhere the radar sensors are locatedwith any object (e.g. adhesives, bikerack, etc.).

If you wish to install the tow hookafter purchasing the vehicle, you needto deactivate the system via theInformation and Entertainment System.To access the function, select thefollowing items in sequence on themain menu:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Safety.”

3. “Blind Spot Alert.”

Rear ViewThe system detects vehicles comingfrom the rear part of your vehicle onboth sides and entering the reardetection area with a difference inspeed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h)with relation to your vehicle.

Overtaking VehiclesIf another vehicle is overtaken slowly,with a difference in speed of less thanapproximately 15 mph (25 km/h) andthe vehicle stays in the blind spot forapproximately 1.5 seconds, thewarning light on the door mirror of thecorresponding side illuminates.If the difference in speed between thetwo vehicles is greater thanapproximately 15 mph (25 km/h), thewarning light does not illuminate.

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP)SystemThis system helps the driver duringreverse maneuvers in the case ofreduced visibility.The RCP system monitors the reardetection areas on both sides of thevehicle to detect objects movingtowards the sides of the vehicle, with aminimum speed between approximately1 mph (1 km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h)and objects moving at a maximumspeed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in areassuch as parking lots.The system activation is signaled to thedriver by an acoustic warning.Note: If the sensors are covered byobjects or vehicles, the system will notwarn the driver.

96

SA

FETY

Warning!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not aback up aid system. It is intended to beused to help a driver detect an oncomingvehicle in a parking lot situation. Driversmust be careful when backing up, evenwhen using RCP. Always check carefullybehind your vehicle, look behind you, andbe sure to check for pedestrians, animals,other vehicles, obstructions, and blindspots before backing up. Failure to do socan result in serious injury or death.

Operating ModeThe system may be activated/deactivated via the Information andEntertainment System. To access thefunction, select the following items onthe main menu in sequence:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Safety.”

3. “Blind Spot Alert.”

"Blind Spot Alert,” "Visual" ModeWhen the system is enabled, the warninglight within the door mirror on the side ofthe detected object illuminates.The visual warning on the mirror willblink if the driver activates the turnsignals, thus indicating the intention tochange lane.

The warning will be fixed if the driverstays in the same lane.

"Blind Spot Alert" FunctionDeactivationWhen the system is deactivated ("BlindSpot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCPsystems will not emit neither anacoustic nor visual warnings.The BSM system will store the operatingmode running when the engine wasstopped. Each time the engine is started,the operating mode stored previously willbe recalled and used.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operateon radio frequency that comply withPart 15 of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Forward CollisionWarning (FCW) System

This is a driving assistance system whichcomprises a radar located behind thefront bumper and a camera located inthe central part of the windshield.

In the event of an imminent collision,the system intervenes by automaticallybraking the vehicle to prevent the crashor reduce its effects.

06016S0003EM

Front Bumper Radar Location

06016S0004EM

Windshield Camera Location

97

The system provides the driver withaudible and visual signals throughspecific messages on the instrumentcluster display.The system may lightly brake to warnthe driver if a possible frontal accident isdetected (limited braking). Signals andlimited braking are intended to allow thedriver to react promptly, in order toprevent or reduce the effects of apotential accident.In situations with the risk of collision, ifthe system detects no intervention bythe driver, it provides automatic brakingto help slow the vehicle and mitigatethe potential frontal collision (automaticbraking). If intervention by the driver onthe brake pedal is detected, but notdeemed sufficient, the system mayintervene in order to improve thereaction of the braking system,therefore reducing vehicle speed further(additional assistance in braking stage).The system will intervene automaticallyin case of imminent collision or impactagainst a pedestrian crossing the road(speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)).Note: For safety reasons, when thevehicle has stopped, the brake calipersmay remain blocked for about twoseconds. Make sure you press thebrake pedal if the vehicle moves slightlyforward.

Warning!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is notintended to avoid a collision on its own,nor can FCW detect every type of potentialcollision. The driver has the responsibility toavoid a collision by controlling the vehiclevia braking and steering. Failure to followthis warning could lead to serious injury ordeath.

Engagement/DisengagementThe following functions can be selectedin sequence using the Information andEntertainment System:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Safety.”

3. “Forward Collision Warning.”

4. “Mode.”Select from among three operatingmodes:

Warning And Brake: the system (ifactive), in addition to the visual andaudible warnings, provides limitedbraking, automatic braking andadditional assistance in braking stage,where the driver does not brakesufficiently in the event of a potentialfrontal impact.

Only Warning: the system (if active),does not provide limited braking, butguarantees automatic braking oradditional assistance in braking stage,where the driver does not brake at all ornot sufficiently in the event of a potentialfrontal impact.

Disable: the system does notprovide visual and audible warnings,limited braking, automatic braking oradditional assistance in braking stage.The system will therefore provide noindication of a possible accident.Activation/DeactivationThe Forward Collision Warning systemis activated whenever the engine isstarted regardless of what is shown onthe Information and EntertainmentSystem.Following a deactivation, the system willnot warn the driver about the possiblecollision with the preceding vehicle,regardless of the setting selected withthe Information and EntertainmentSystem.Note: Each time the engine is started,the system is activated regardless ofwhat setting was selected when theengine was turned OFFThis function is not active at a speedlower than 4 mph (7 km/h) or higherthan 124 mph (200 km/h).

98

SA

FETY

The system is active:

Each time the engine is started.

In the Information and EntertainmentSystem.

When the ignition is in the ON position.

The vehicle speed is between 4 mph(7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h).

When the front seat belts are fastened.

Changing The System SensitivityThe sensitivity of the system can bechanged through the Information andEntertainment System menu, choosingfrom one of the following three options:"Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to thedescription in the “Information andEntertainment System Supplement”for how to change the settings.The default setting is "Med". With thissetting, the system warns the driver of apossible collision with the vehicle in frontwhen that vehicle is at a standarddistance, between that of the other twosettings.With the system sensitivity set to "Far",the system will warn the driver of apossible collision with the vehicle infront when that vehicle is at a greaterdistance, thus providing the possibilityof acting on the brakes more lightly andgradually. This setting provides thedrivers with the maximum possiblereaction time to prevent a potentialaccident.

With the option set to "Near", thesystem will alert the driver of a possiblecollision with the vehicle in front whenthat vehicle is close. This setting offersthe driver a lower reaction timecompared to the "Med" and "Far"settings, in the event of a potentialcollision, but permits more dynamicdriving of the vehicle.The system sensitivity setting is kept inthe memory when the engine is turnedOFF.System Limited Operation SignalIf a dedicated message is displayed, acondition limiting the system operationmay have occurred. The possiblereasons of this limitation are somethingblocking the camera view or a fault.If an obstruction is signaled, clean thearea of the windshield indicated in.Although the vehicle can still be drivenin normal conditions, the system maybe not completely available.When the conditions limiting the systemfunctions end, this will go back to normaland complete operation. Should the faultpersist, contact an authorized dealer.System Failure SignalingIf the system turns off and a dedicatedmessage is shown on the display, itmeans that there is a fault with thesystem.

In this case, it is still possible to drivethe vehicle, but you are advised tocontact an authorized dealer as soonas possible.Radar Indication Not AvailableIf conditions are such that the radarcannot detect obstacles correctly, thesystem is deactivated and a dedicatedmessage appears on the display. Thisgenerally occurs in the event of poorvisibility, such as when it is snowing orraining heavily.The function of this system canalso be temporarily reduced due toobstructions such as mud, dirt or ice onthe bumper. In such cases, a dedicatedmessage will be shown on the displayand the system will be deactivated.This message can sometimes appearin conditions of high reflectivity(e.g. tunnels with reflective tiles or ice orsnow). When the conditions limiting thesystem functions end, it will go back tonormal and complete operation.In certain cases, this dedicatedmessage could be displayed when theradar is not detecting any vehicles orobjects within its view range.If atmospheric conditions are not thereason behind this message, check ifthe sensor is dirty. It could benecessary to clean or remove anyobstructions in the area.

99

If the message appears frequently,even in the absence of atmosphericconditions such as snow, rain, mud orother obstructions, contact anauthorized dealer for a sensoralignment check.In the absence of visible obstructions,manually removing the decorative covertrim and cleaning the radar surfacecould be required. Have this operationperformed at an authorized dealer.Note: It is recommended that you donot install devices, accessories oraerodynamic attachments in front of thesensor or darken it in any way, as thiscan compromise the correct functioningof the system.Frontal Collision Alarm With ActiveBraking — If EquippedIf this function is selected, the brakesare operated to reduce the speed of thevehicle in the event of potential frontalimpact.This function applies an additionalbraking pressure if the braking pressureapplied by the driver does not suffice toprevent potential frontal impact.The function is active with speed above4 mph (7 km/h).

Driving In Special ConditionsIn certain driving conditions, systemintervention might be unexpected ordelayed. The driver must therefore bevery careful, keeping control of thevehicle to drive in complete safety.

Driving close to a bend.

The vehicle ahead is leaving aroundabout.

Vehicles with small dimensionsand/or not aligned in the driving lane.

Lane change by other vehicles.

Vehicles traveling at right angles tothe vehicle.System intervention might beunexpected or delayed. The driver musttherefore be very careful, keepingcontrol of the vehicle to drive incomplete safety.Note: In particularly complex trafficconditions, the driver can deactivate thesystem manually through theInformation and Entertainment System.Driving Close To A BendWhen entering or leaving a wide bend,the system may detect a vehicle in frontyou, but not driving on the same drivinglane. In cases such as these, thesystem may intervene.

The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving ARoundaboutOn a roundabout, the system couldintervene if it detects a vehicle aheadwhich is leaving the roundabout.

06016S0005EM

Driving Around Wide Curves

06016S0010EM

Driving In Roundabouts

100

SA

FETY

Vehicles With Small DimensionsAnd/Or Not Aligned In The DrivingLaneThe system cannot detect vehicles infront of you but outside the range of theradar sensor and may therefore notreact in the presence of small vehicles,such as bicycles or motorcycles.

Lane Change By Other VehiclesVehicles suddenly changing lanes toenter the same lane as your vehiclewithin the operating range of the radarsensor, may cause the system tointervene.

Vehicles Traveling At Right AnglesTo The VehicleThe system may temporarily react to avehicle that is passing through the radarsensor’s operating range at right angles.

Warning!

The system has not been designed toprevent impacts and cannot detect possibleconditions leading to an accident in advance.Failure to take into account this warning maylead to serious or fatal injuries.

The system may activate, assessing thetrajectory of the vehicle, for the presence ofreflecting metal objects different from othervehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs,barriers before parking lots, tollgates, levelcrossings, gates, railways, objects near roadconstructions sites or higher than the vehicle(e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the systemmay intervene inside multi-story parking lotsor tunnels, or due to a glare on the roadsurface. These possible activations are aconsequence of the real driving scenariocoverage by the system and must not beregarded as faults.

The system has been designed for roaduse only. If the vehicle is driven on a track,the system must be deactivated to avoidunnecessary warnings. Automaticdeactivation is signaled by the dedicatedwarning light/symbol switching on in theinstrument panel (refer to the instructions inthe "Warning Lights And Messages On TheInstrument Panel" in "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" for further information).

06016S0006EM

Driving Near Small Vehicles

06016S0007EM

Other Vehicles Changing Lanes

06016S0008EM

Other Vehicle Passing ThroughRadar Range

101

Tire PressureMonitoring System(TPMS)This vehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)that sends the inflation pressureinformation of each tire to the controlunit, and will signal the driver in theevent of insufficient tire pressure.Tire pressure will vary with temperatureby approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every12°F (6.5°C). This means that when theoutside temperature decreases,the tire pressure will also decrease.Tire pressure should always be setbased on cold inflation tire pressure.This is defined as the tire pressure afterthe vehicle has not been driven for atleast three hours, or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hourperiod. The cold tire inflation pressuremust not exceed the maximum inflationpressure molded into the tire sidewall.Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing AndMaintenance” for information on howto properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.The tire pressure will also increase asthe vehicle is driven. This is normal, andthere should be no adjustment for thisincreased pressure.The TPMS will signal the driver ifpressure falls below the warning limitfor any reason, including the effects oflow temperature and normal loss ofpressure from the tire.

The TPMS will stop indicatinginsufficient tire pressure when pressureis equal to or greater than theprescribed cold inflation level.Therefore, if insufficient tire pressure isindicated by the ( ) warning lightdisplaying in the instrument cluster,increase the inflation pressure up to theprescribed cold inflation value.The system will automatically update,and the “Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light” will turn off once thesystem receives the updated tirepressures. The vehicle may need to bedriven for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMSto receive this information.

Operating ExampleFor example, your vehicle may have arecommended cold (parked for morethan three hours) placard pressure of33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambienttemperature is 68°F (20°C), and themeasured tire pressure is 28 psi(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F(-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure toapproximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tirepressure is low enough to turn on the“Tire Pressure Monitoring WarningLight.” Driving the vehicle maycause the tire pressure to rise toapproximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” willturn off only after the tires are inflatedto the vehicle’s recommended coldplacard pressure value.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for theoriginal equipment tires and wheels.TPMS pressures and warning have beenestablished for the tire size equipped onyour vehicle. Undesirable system operationor sensor damage may result when usingreplacement equipment that is not of thesame size, type, and/or style. The TPMsensor is not designed for use onaftermarket wheels and may contribute to apoor overall system performance or sensordamage. Customers are encouraged touse OEM wheels to assure proper TPMfeature operation.

Using aftermarket tire sealants maycause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.After using an aftermarket tire sealant it isrecommended that you take your vehicle toyour authorized dealer to have your sensorfunction checked.

After inspecting or adjusting the tirepressure always reinstall the valve stemcap. This will prevent moisture and dirtfrom entering the valve stem, which coulddamage the TPMS sensor.

102

SA

FETY

INSUFFICIENT TIRE PRESSUREINDICATIONIf an insufficient pressure value isdetected on one or more tires, the

warning light in the instrumentcluster will display alongside thededicated messages, the system willhighlight the tire or tires with insufficientpressure graphically, and an acousticsignal will be emitted.In this case, stop the vehicle, check theinflation pressure of each tire, andinflate the necessary tire or tires to thecorrect cold inflation pressure value,shown on the display or in thededicated TPMS menu.

TPMS TEMPORARILY DISABLED

TPMS Check MessageWhen a system fault is detected, the“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”will flash on and off for 75 seconds, andthen remain on solid. The system faultwill also sound a chime. If the ignitionis cycled, this sequence will repeat,provided that the system fault stillexists. The “Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light” will turn off when the faultcondition no longer exists. A systemfault can occur due to any of thefollowing:

Jamming due to electronic devicesor driving next to facilities emitting thesame radio frequencies as the TPMSsensors.

Installing some form of aftermarketwindow tinting that affects radio wavesignals.

Accumulation of snow or ice aroundthe wheels or wheel housings.

Using tire chains on the vehicle.

Using wheels/tires not equipped withTPMS sensors.After the punctured tire has beenrepaired with the original tire sealantcontained in the Tire Repair Kit, theprevious condition must be restored sothat the warning light is off duringnormal driving.

TPMS DeactivationThe TPMS can be deactivated byreplacing all four wheel and tireassemblies (road tires) with wheel andtire assemblies that do not have TPMSSensors, such as when installing winterwheel and tire assemblies on yourvehicle.To deactivate the TPMS, first replace allfour wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)with tires not equipped with Tire PressureMonitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drivethe vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the"TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and offfor 75 seconds and then remain on.The instrument cluster will display the“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message andthen display dashes (--) in place of thepressure values.

Beginning with the next ignition switchcycle, the TPMS will no longer chime ordisplay the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”message in the instrument cluster.Instead, dashes (--) will remain in placeof the pressure values.To reactivate the TPMS, replace all fourwheel and tire assemblies (road tires)with tires equipped with TPM sensors.Then, drive the vehicle for up to20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).The TPMS will chime, the "TPM TelltaleLight" will flash on and off for 75 secondsand then turn off. The instrument clusterwill display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”message and then display pressurevalues in place of the dashes. On thenext ignition switch cycle the "SERVICETPM SYSTEM" message will no longerbe displayed, as long as no system faultexists.

Note:The TPMS is not intended to

replace normal tire care andmaintenance, or to provide warningof a tire failure or condition.

The TPMS should not be used as atire pressure gauge while adjustingyour tire pressure.

Driving on a significantlyunderinflated tire will cause the tire tooverheat, and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

103

The TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure using anaccurate tire pressure gauge, even ifunderinflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light”.

Seasonal temperature changes willaffect tire pressure, and the TPMS willmonitor the actual tire pressure in thetire.

General Information

The following regulatory statementapplies to all radio frequency (RF)devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference.(2) This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.Note: Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.

OCCUPANTRESTRAINTSYSTEMSSome of the most important safetyfeatures in your vehicle are the restraintsystems:

Occupant RestraintSystems Features

Seat Belt Systems

Supplemental Restraint Systems(SRS) Air Bags

Child Restraints

Some of the safety features describedin this section may be standardequipment on some models, or may beoptional equipment on others. If you arenot sure, ask your authorized dealer.

Important SafetyPrecautions

Please pay close attention to theinformation in this section. It tells youhow to use your restraint systemproperly, to keep you and yourpassengers as safe as possible.Here are some simple steps you cantake to minimize the risk of harm from adeploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and undershould always ride buckled up in avehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (notin a rear-facing child restraint) must ridein the front passenger seat, move theseat as far back as possible and usethe proper child restraint (refer to “ChildRestraints” in this section for furtherinformation).

3. Children that are not big enough towear the vehicle seat belt properly (referto “Child Restraints” in this section forfurther information) should be securedin a vehicle with a rear seat in childrestraints or belt-positioning boosterseats. Older children who do not usechild restraints or belt-positioningbooster seats should ride properlybuckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide theshoulder belt behind them or undertheir arm.

5. You should read the instructionsprovided with your child restraint tomake sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always weartheir lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seatsshould be moved back as far aspractical to allow the front air bagsroom to inflate.

104

SA

FETY

8. Do not lean against the door orwindow. If your vehicle has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the sideair bags will inflate forcefully into thespace between occupants and thedoor and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicleneeds to be modified to accommodatea disabled person, refer to the“Customer Assistance” section forcustomer service contact information.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deployingpassenger front air bag can cause death orserious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facingchild restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in avehicle with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are anexcellent driver, even on short trips.Someone on the road may be a poordriver and could cause a collision thatincludes you. This can happen far awayfrom home or on your own street.Research has shown that seat beltssave lives, and they can reduce theseriousness of injuries in a collision.

Some of the worst injuries happenwhen people are thrown from thevehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibilityof ejection and the risk of injury causedby striking the inside of the vehicle.Everyone in a motor vehicle should bebelted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt UseReminder System (BeltAlert)

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert —If Equipped

BeltAlert is a feature intended toremind the driver and outboard frontseat passenger (if equipped withoutboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alertfeature is active whenever the ignitionswitch is in the START or ON/RUNposition.Initial IndicationIf the driver is unbuckled when theignition switch is first in the START orON/RUN position, a chime will signal fora few seconds. If the driver or outboardfront seat passenger (if equipped withoutboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)is unbuckled when the ignition switch isfirst in the START or ON/RUN positionthe Seat Belt Reminder Light will turnon and remain on until both outboardfront seat belts are buckled. Theoutboard front passenger seat BeltAlertis not active when an outboard frontpassenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning SequenceThe BeltAlert warning sequence isactivated when the vehicle is movingabove a specified vehicle speed rangeand the driver or outboard front seatpassenger is unbuckled (if equippedwith outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert) (the outboard front passengerseat BeltAlert is not active when theoutboard front passenger seat isunoccupied). The BeltAlert warningsequence starts by blinking the SeatBelt Reminder Light and sounding anintermittent chime. Once the BeltAlertwarning sequence has completed, theSeat Belt Reminder Light will remain onuntil the seat belts are buckled. TheBeltAlert warning sequence may repeatbased on vehicle speed until the driverand occupied outboard front seatpassenger seat belts are buckled. Thedriver should instruct all occupants tobuckle their seat belts.Change Of StatusIf the driver or outboard front seatpassenger (if equipped with outboardfront passenger seat BeltAlert)unbuckles their seat belt while thevehicle is traveling, the BeltAlertwarning sequence will begin until theseat belts are buckled again.The outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert is not active when theoutboard front passenger seat isunoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggeredwhen an animal or other items are

105

placed on the outboard front passengerseat or when the seat is folded flat(if equipped). It is recommended thatpets be restrained in the rear seat(if equipped) in pet harnesses or petcarriers that are secured by seat belts,and cargo is properly stowed.BeltAlert can be activated ordeactivated by your authorized dealer.FCA US LLC does not recommenddeactivating BeltAlert.Note: If BeltAlert has been deactivatedand the driver or outboard front seatpassenger (if equipped with outboardfront passenger seat BeltAlert) isunbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Lightwill turn on and remain on until thedriver and outboard front seatpassenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle areequipped with lap/shoulder belts.The seat belt webbing retractor will lockonly during very sudden stops orcollisions. This feature allows theshoulder part of the seat belt to movefreely with you under normal conditions.However, in a collision the seat belt willlock and reduce your risk of striking theinside of the vehicle or being thrown outof the vehicle.

Warning!

Relying on the air bags alone could leadto more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear yourseat belt even though you have air bags.

In a collision, you and your passengerscan suffer much greater injuries if you arenot properly buckled up. You can strike theinterior of your vehicle or other passengers,or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.Always be sure you and others in yourvehicle are buckled up properly.

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.Occupants, including the driver, shouldalways wear their seat belts whether or notan air bag is also provided at their seatingposition to minimize the risk of severe injuryor death in the event of a crash.

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly couldmake your injuries in a collision much worse.You might suffer internal injuries, or you couldeven slide out of the seat belt. Follow theseinstructions to wear your seat belt safely andto keep your passengers safe, too.

Two people should never be belted intoa single seat belt. People belted togethercan crash into one another in a collision,hurting one another badly. Never use alap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more thanone person, no matter what their size.

Warning!

A lap belt worn too high can increasethe risk of injury in a collision. The seat beltforces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvicbones, but across your abdomen. Alwayswear the lap part of your seat belt as lowas possible and keep it snug.

A twisted seat belt may not protect youproperly. In a collision, it could even cut intoyou. Be sure the seat belt is flat againstyour body, without twists. If you can’tstraighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take itto your authorized dealer immediately andhave it fixed.

A seat belt that is buckled into thewrong buckle will not protect you properly.The lap portion could ride too high on yourbody, possibly causing internal injuries.Always buckle your seat belt into thebuckle nearest you.

A seat belt that is too loose will not protectyou properly. In a sudden stop, you couldmove too far forward, increasing the possibilityof injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

A seat belt that is worn under your armis dangerous. Your body could strike theinside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt

106

SA

FETY

worn under the arm can cause internalinjuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. Wear the seat belt over yourshoulder so that your strongest bones willtake the force in a collision.

A shoulder belt placed behind you willnot protect you from injury during acollision. You are more likely to hit yourhead in a collision if you do not wear yourshoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt aremeant to be used together.

A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apartin a collision and leave you with noprotection. Inspect the seat belt systemperiodically, checking for cuts, frays, orloose parts. Damaged parts must bereplaced immediately. Do not disassembleor modify the seat belt system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after acollision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt OperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door.Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above theback of the front seat, and next to yourarm in the rear seat (for vehiclesequipped with a rear seat). Grasp thelatch plate and pull out the seat belt.Slide the latch plate up the webbing asfar as necessary to allow the seat beltto go around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough tofit, insert the latch plate into the buckleuntil you hear a “click.”

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snugand lies low across your hips, belowyour abdomen. To remove slack in thelap belt portion, pull up on the shoulderbelt. To loosen the lap belt if it is tootight, tilt the latch plate and pull on thelap belt. A snug seat belt reduces therisk of sliding under the seat belt in acollision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across theshoulder and chest with minimal, if anyslack so that it is comfortable and notresting on your neck. The retractor willwithdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push thered button on the buckle. The seat beltwill automatically retract to its stowedposition. If necessary, slide the latchplate down the webbing to allow theseat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt UntwistingProcedure

Use the following procedure to untwista twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close aspossible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to30 cm) above the latch plate,grasp and twist the seat belt webbing180 degrees to create a fold that beginsimmediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over thefolded webbing. The folded webbingmust enter the slot at the top of thelatch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate upuntil it clears the folded webbing andthe seat belt is no longer twisted.

06046S0001NA

Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted IntoSeat Belt Buckle

107

Second Row Center Seat BeltOperating Instructions

The second row center seat beltfeatures a seat belt with a mini-latchplate and buckle, which allows the seat

belt to detach from the lower anchorwhen the seat is folded. The mini-latchplate and regular latch plate can thenbe stored out of the way in the parceltray for added convenience to open uputilization of the storage areas behindthe front seats when the seat is notoccupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate andregular latch plate from its stowedposition in the right rear side trim panel.

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pullthe seat belt over the seat.

3. Route the shoulder belt to the insideof the right head restraint.

4. When the seat belt is long enough tofit, insert the mini-latch plate into themini-buckle until you hear a “click.”

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regularlatch plate up the webbing as far asnecessary to allow the seat belt to goaround your lap.

6. When the seat belt is long enough tofit, insert the latch plate into the buckleuntil you hear a “click.”

7. Position the lap belt so that it is snugand lies low across your hips, belowyour abdomen. To remove slack in thelap belt portion, pull up on the shoulderbelt. To loosen the lap belt if it is tootight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seatbelt reduces the risk of sliding under theseat belt in a collision.

8. Position the shoulder belt on yourchest so that it is comfortable and notresting on your neck. The retractor willwithdraw any slack in the seat belt.

9. To release the seat belt, push thered button on the buckle.

10. To disengage the mini-latch platefrom the mini-buckle for storage, insertthe regular latch plate into the blackbutton on the top of the mini-buckle.The seat belt will automatically retract toits stowed position. If necessary, slidethe latch plate down the webbing toallow the seat belt to retract fully. Insertthe mini-latch plate and regular latchplate into its stowed position.

Warning!

If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckleare not properly connected when the seatbelt is used by an occupant, the seat beltwill not be able to provide proper restraintand will increase the risk of injury in acollision.

When reattaching the mini-latch plate andmini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing isnot twisted. If the webbing is twisted, followthe preceding procedure to detach themini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist thewebbing, and reattach the mini-latch plateand mini-buckle.

06056S0002EM

Second Row Seat Belts

1 — SeatBelt Buckle

3 — MiniLatch Plate

5 — MiniBuckleRelease2 — Seat

Belt LatchPlate

4 — MiniSeat BeltBuckle

108

SA

FETY

Seat Belts And PregnantWomen

Seat belts must be worn by alloccupants including pregnant women:the risk of injury in the event of anaccident is reduced for the mother andthe unborn child if they are wearing aseat belt.Position the lap belt snug and low belowthe abdomen and across the strongbones of the hips. Place the shoulderbelt across the chest and away from theneck. Never place the shoulder beltbehind the back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equippedwith pretensioning devices that aredesigned to remove slack from the seatbelt in the event of a collision. Thesedevices may improve the performanceof the seat belt by removing slack fromthe seat belt early in a collision.

Pretensioners work for all sizeoccupants, including those in childrestraints.Note: These devices are not asubstitute for proper seat beltplacement by the occupant. The seatbelt still must be worn snugly andpositioned properly.The pretensioners are triggered by theOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC).Like the air bags, the pretensionersare single use items. A deployedpretensioner or a deployed air bag mustbe replaced immediately.

Energy Management FeatureThe front seat belt system is equippedwith an Energy Management featurethat may help further reduce the riskof injury in the event of a collision.The seat belt system has a retractorassembly that is designed to releasewebbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic LockingRetractors (ALR)The seat belts in the passenger seatingpositions are equipped with a SwitchableAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) whichis used to secure a child restraint system.For additional information, refer to“Installing Child Restraints Using TheVehicle Seat Belt” under the “ChildRestraints” section of this manual. Thefigure below illustrates the locking featurefor each seating position.

If the passenger seating position isequipped with an ALR and is beingused for normal usage, only pull theseat belt webbing out far enough tocomfortably wrap around theoccupant’s mid-section so as to notactivate the ALR. If the ALR isactivated, you will hear a clicking soundas the seat belt retracts. Allow thewebbing to retract completely in thiscase and then carefully pull out only theamount of webbing necessary tocomfortably wrap around theoccupant’s mid-section. Slide the latchplate into the buckle until you hear a"click."In Automatic Locking Mode, theshoulder belt is automaticallypre-locked. The seat belt will still retractto remove any slack in the shoulderbelt. Use the Automatic Locking Modeanytime a child restraint is installed in aseating position that has a seat belt

0226075266

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

06086S0102NA

ALR — Switchable AutomaticLocking Retractor

109

with this feature. Children 12 years oldand under should always be properlyrestrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deployingpassenger front air bag can cause deathor serious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facingchild restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint ina vehicle with a rear seat.

How To Engage The AutomaticLocking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap andshoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pulldownward until the entire seat belt isextracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As theseat belt retracts, you will hear a clickingsound. This indicates the seat belt is nowin the Automatic Locking Mode.How To Disengage The AutomaticLocking ModeUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulderbelt and allow it to retract completely todisengage the Automatic Locking Modeand activate the vehicle sensitive(emergency) locking mode.

Warning!

The seat belt assembly must bereplaced if the switchable AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) feature or anyother seat belt function is not workingproperly when checked according to theprocedures in the Service Manual.

Failure to replace the seat beltassembly could increase the risk of injuryin collisions.

Do not use the Automatic Locking Modeto restrain occupants who are wearing theseat belt or children who are using boosterseats. The locked mode is only used toinstall rear-facing or forward-facing childrestraints that have a harness forrestraining the child.

Supplemental RestraintSystems (SRS)

Some of the safety features describedin this section may be standardequipment on some models, or may beoptional equipment on others. If you arenot sure, ask your authorized dealer.The air bag system must be ready toprotect you in a collision. The OccupantRestraint Controller (ORC) monitors theinternal circuits and interconnectingwiring associated with the electrical Air

Bag System Components. Your vehiclemay be equipped with the following AirBag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Air Bag Warning Light

Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

Knee Impact Bolsters

Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Knee Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Seat Track Position Sensors

Seat Belt Buckle Switch


The ORC monitors the readiness of theelectronic parts of the air bag systemwhenever the ignition switch is in theSTART or ON/RUN position. If theignition switch is in the OFF position or inthe ACC position, the air bag system isnot on and the air bags will not inflate.

110

SA

FETY

The ORC contains a backup powersupply system that may deploy the airbag system even if the battery losespower or it becomes disconnectedprior to deployment.The ORC turns on the Air Bag WarningLight in the instrument panel forapproximately four to eight seconds for aself-check when the ignition switch is firstin the ON/RUN position. After theself-check, the Air Bag Warning Light willturn off. If the ORC detects a malfunctionin any part of the system, it turns on theAir Bag Warning Light, eithermomentarily or continuously. A singlechime will sound to alert you if the lightcomes on again after initial startup.The ORC also includes diagnostics thatwill illuminate the instrument panel AirBag Warning Light if a malfunction isdetected that could affect the air bagsystem. The diagnostics also record thenature of the malfunction. While the airbag system is designed to bemaintenance free, if any of the followingoccurs, have an authorized dealerservice the air bag system immediately.

The Air Bag Warning Light does notcome on during the four to eightseconds when the ignition switch is firstin the ON/RUN position.

The Air Bag Warning Light remainson after the four to eight-secondinterval.

The Air Bag Warning Light comes onintermittently or remains on whiledriving.Note: If the speedometer, tachometer,or any engine related gauges are notworking, the Occupant RestraintController (ORC) may also be disabled.In this condition the air bags may notbe ready to inflate for your protection.Have an authorized dealer service theair bag system immediately.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in yourinstrument panel could mean you won’thave the air bag system to protect you in acollision. If the light does not come on as abulb check when the ignition is first turnedon, stays on after you start the vehicle, or ifit comes on as you drive, have anauthorized dealer service the air bagsystem immediately.

Redundant Air Bag WarningLight

If a fault with the Air Bag WarningLight is detected, which could affect theSupplemental Restraint System (SRS),the Redundant Air Bag Warning Lightwill illuminate on the instrument panel.The Redundant Air Bag Warning Lightwill stay on until the fault is cleared. Inaddition, a single chime will sound toalert you that the Redundant Air BagWarning Light has come on and a faulthas been detected. If the Redundant AirBag Warning Light comes onintermittently or remains on while drivinghave an authorized dealer service thevehicle immediately. For additionalinformation regarding the Redundant AirBag Warning Light, refer to “WarningLights And Messages” in the “GettingTo Know Your Instrument Panel”section of this manual.

111

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags andlap/shoulder belts for both the driverand front passenger. The front air bagsare a supplement to the seat beltrestraint systems. The driver front airbag is mounted in the center of thesteering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel,above the glove compartment. Thewords “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” areembossed on the air bag covers.

Warning!

Being too close to the steering wheel orinstrument panel during front air bagdeployment could cause serious injury,including death. Air bags need room toinflate. Sit back, comfortably extendingyour arms to reach the steering wheel orinstrument panel.

Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deployingpassenger front air bag can cause deathor serious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facingchild restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint ina vehicle with a rear seat.

Driver And Passenger Front AirBag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag systemhas multistage driver and frontpassenger air bags. This systemprovides output appropriate to theseverity and type of collision asdetermined by the Occupant RestraintController (ORC), which may receiveinformation from the front impactsensors (if equipped) or other systemcomponents.The first stage inflator is triggeredimmediately during an impact thatrequires air bag deployment. A lowenergy output is used in less severecollisions. A higher energy output isused for more severe collisions.This vehicle may be equipped with adriver and/or front passenger seat beltbuckle switch that detects whether thedriver or front passenger seat belt isbuckled. The seat belt buckle switchmay adjust the inflation rate of theAdvanced Front Air Bags.This vehicle may be equipped withdriver and/or front passenger seat trackposition sensors that may adjust theinflation rate of the Advanced Front AirBags based upon seat position.

06106S0001EM

Driver Air Bag

06106S0002EM

Passenger Air Bag

112

SA

FETY

Warning!

No objects should be placed over ornear the air bag on the instrument panel orsteering wheel because any such objectscould cause harm if the vehicle is in acollision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.

Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open themmanually. You may damage the air bagsand you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional. Theprotective covers for the air bag cushionsare designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.

Relying on the air bags alone could leadto more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, air bagswon’t deploy at all. Always wear your seatbelts even though you have air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provideadditional protection by supplementingthe seat belts. Front air bags are notexpected to reduce the risk of injury inrear, side, or rollover collisions. The frontair bags will not deploy in all frontalcollisions, including some that may

produce substantial vehicle damage —for example, some pole collisions, truckunderrides, and angle offset collisions.On the other hand, depending on thetype and location of impact, front airbags may deploy in crashes with littlevehicle front-end damage but thatproduce a severe initial deceleration.Because air bag sensors measurevehicle deceleration over time, vehiclespeed and damage by themselves arenot good indicators of whether or notan air bag should have deployed.Seat belts are necessary for yourprotection in all collisions, and also areneeded to help keep you in position,away from an inflating air bag.When the ORC detects a collisionrequiring the front air bags, it signals theinflator units. A large quantity ofnon-toxic gas is generated to inflate thefront air bags.The steering wheel hub trim cover andthe upper right side of the instrumentpanel separate and fold out of the wayas the air bags inflate to their full size.The front air bags fully inflate in lesstime than it takes to blink your eyes.The front air bags then quickly deflatewhile helping to restrain the driver andfront passenger.


The Knee Impact Bolsters help protectthe knees of the driver and frontpassenger, and position the frontoccupants for improved interaction withthe front air bags.

Warning!

Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the kneeimpact bolsters in any way.

Do not mount any accessories to theknee impact bolsters such as alarm lights,stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver And FrontPassenger Knee Air Bags

This vehicle is equipped with aSupplemental Driver Knee Air Bagmounted in the instrument panelbelow the steering column and aSupplemental Passenger Knee AirBag mounted in the instrument panelbelow the glove compartment.

113

The Supplemental Knee Air Bagsprovide enhanced protection during afrontal impact by working together withthe seat belts, pretensioners, and frontair bags.


Your vehicle is equipped with two typesof side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted SideAir Bags (SABs): Located in theoutboard side of the front seats. TheSABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG”or “AIRBAG” label sewn into theoutboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the riskof occupant injury during certain sideimpacts and/or vehicle rollover events,in addition to the injury reductionpotential provided by the seat belts andbody structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens theseam on the outboard side of theseatback’s trim cover. The inflating SABdeploys through the seat seam into thespace between the occupant and thedoor. The SAB moves at a very high

speed and with such a high force that itcould injure occupants if they are notseated properly, or if items arepositioned in the area where the SABinflates. Children are at an even greaterrisk of injury from a deploying air bag.

Warning!

Do not use accessory seat covers or placeobjects between you and the Side AirBags; the performance could be adverselyaffected and/or objects could be pushedinto you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag InflatableCurtains (SABICs): Located above theside windows. The trim covering theSABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or“AIRBAG.”

06096S0102NA

Driver Knee Air Bag

06096S0103NA

Front Passenger Knee Air Bag

06106S0004EM

Front Supplemental Seat-MountedSide Air Bag

06106S0005EM

Supplemental Side Air BagInflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label

Location

114

SA

FETY

SABICs may help reduce the risk ofhead or other injuries to front and rearseat outboard occupants in certain sideimpacts and/or vehicle rollover events,in addition to the injury reductionpotential provided by the seat belts andbody structure.

The SABICs deploy downward,covering the side windows. An inflatingSABIC pushes the outside edge of thetrim out of the way and covers thewindow. The SABICs inflate withenough force to injure occupants if theyare not belted and seated properly, or ifitems are positioned in the area wherethe SABICs inflate. Children are at aneven greater risk of injury from adeploying air bag.

Warning!

Do not stack luggage or other cargo uphigh enough to block the deployment ofthe SABICs. The trim covering above theside windows where the SABIC and itsdeployment path are located shouldremain free from any obstructions.

In order for the SABICs to work asintended, do not install any accessoryitems in your vehicle which could alter theroof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof toyour vehicle. Do not add roof racks thatrequire permanent attachments (bolts orscrews) for installation on the vehicle roof.Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle forany reason.

The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags)are designed to activate in certain sideimpacts and certain rollover events. TheOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC)determines whether the deployment ofthe Side Air Bags in a particular sideimpact or rollover event is appropriate,based on the severity and type ofcollision. Vehicle damage by itself is nota good indicator of whether or not SideAir Bags should have deployed.Side Air Bags are a supplement to theseat belt restraint system. Side Air Bagsdeploy in less time than it takes to blinkyour eyes.

Warning!

Occupants, including children, who areup against or very close to Side Air Bagscan be seriously injured or killed.Occupants, including children, shouldnever lean on or sleep against the door,side windows, or area where the side airbags inflate, even if they are in an infant orchild restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints whereappropriate) are necessary for yourprotection in all collisions. They also helpkeep you in position, away from an inflatingSide Air Bag. To get the best protectionfrom the Side Air Bags, occupants mustwear their seat belts properly and situpright with their backs against the seats.Children must be properly restrained in achild restraint or booster seat that isappropriate for the size of the child.

Warning!

Side Air Bags need room to inflate.Do not lean against the door or window.Sit upright in the center of the seat.

Being too close to the Side Air Bagsduring deployment could cause you to beseverely injured or killed.

Relying on the Side Air Bags alone couldlead to more severe injuries in a collision.The Side Air Bags work with your seat beltto restrain you properly. In some collisions,Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Alwayswear your seat belt even though you haveSide Air Bags.

Note: Air bag covers may not beobvious in the interior trim, but they willopen during air bag deployment.Side ImpactsIn side impacts, the side impactsensors aid the ORC in determining theappropriate response to impact events.The system is calibrated to deploy theSide Air Bags on the impact side of thevehicle during impacts that require SideAir Bag occupant protection. In sideimpacts, the Side Air Bags deployindependently; a left side impactdeploys the left Side Air Bags only anda right side impact deploys the rightSide Air Bags only.

115

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in allside collisions, including some collisionsat certain angles, or some sidecollisions that do not impact the area ofthe passenger compartment. The SideAir Bags may deploy during angled oroffset frontal collisions where the frontair bags deploy.Rollover EventsSide Air Bags are designed to activatein certain rollover events. The ORCdetermines whether the deployment ofthe Side Air Bags in a particular rolloverevent is appropriate, based on theseverity and type of collision. Vehicledamage by itself is not a good indicatorof whether or not Side Air Bags shouldhave deployed.The Side Air Bags will not deploy in allrollover events. The rollover sensingsystem determines if a rollover eventmay be in progress and whetherdeployment is appropriate. In the eventthe vehicle experiences a rollover ornear rollover event, and deployment ofthe Side Air Bags is appropriate, therollover sensing system will also deploythe seat belt pretensioners on bothsides of the vehicle.The SABICs may help reduce the risk ofpartial or complete ejection of vehicleoccupants through side windows incertain rollover or side impact events.

The Occupant Restraint Controller(ORC) monitors the internal circuits andinterconnecting wiring associated withelectrical Air Bag System Componentslisted below:

Air Bag System Components

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)


Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel


Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags


Supplemental Knee Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Seat Track Position Sensors

Seat Belt Buckle Switch

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed todeflate immediately after deployment.Note: Front and/or side air bags willnot deploy in all collisions. This doesnot mean something is wrong with theair bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploysthe air bags, any or all of the followingmay occur:

The air bag material may sometimescause abrasions and/or skin reddeningto the occupants as the air bags deployand unfold. The abrasions are similar tofriction rope burns or those you mightget sliding along a carpet or gymnasiumfloor. They are not caused by contactwith chemicals. They are not permanentand normally heal quickly. However, ifyou haven’t healed significantly within afew days, or if you have any blistering,see your doctor immediately.

As the air bags deflate, you maysee some smoke-like particles.The particles are a normal by-productof the process that generates thenon-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.These airborne particles may irritate theskin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you haveskin or eye irritation, rinse the area withcool water. For nose or throat irritation,move to fresh air. If the irritationcontinues, see your doctor. If theseparticles settle on your clothing, followthe garment manufacturer’s instructionsfor cleaning.Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed. If you are involvedin another collision, the air bags will notbe in place to protect you.

116

SA

FETY

Warning!

Deployed air bags and seat beltpretensioners cannot protect you inanother collision. Have the air bags, seatbelt pretensioners, and the seat beltretractor assemblies replaced by anauthorized dealer immediately. Also, havethe Occupant Restraint Controller Systemserviced as well.

Note:

Air bag covers may not be obviousin the interior trim, but they will openduring air bag deployment.

After any collision, the vehicleshould be taken to an authorizeddealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident ResponseSystem

In the event of an impact, if thecommunication network remains intact,and the power remains intact,depending on the nature of the event,the ORC will determine whether to havethe Enhanced Accident ResponseSystem perform the following functions:

Cut off fuel to the engine.

Flash hazard lights as long as thebattery has power or until the hazardlight button is pressed. The hazard

lights can be deactivated by pressingthe hazard light button.

Turn on the interior lights, whichremain on as long as the battery haspower or for 15 minutes from theintervention of the Enhanced AccidentResponse System.

Unlock the power door locks.

Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater(if equipped).

Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.

Cut off battery power to the:

– Engine

– Electric power steering

– Brake booster

– Electric park brake

– Automatic transmission gearselector

– Horn

– Front wiper

– Headlamp washer pump

Enhanced Accident ResponseSystem Reset Procedure

After the event occurs, when thesystem is active, a message regardingfuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignitionswitch from ignition AVV/START orMAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition

STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check thevehicle for fuel leaks in the enginecompartment and on the ground nearthe engine compartment and fuel tankbefore resetting the system and startingthe engine.Depending on the nature of the eventthe left and right turn signal lights,located in the instrument panel, mayboth be blinking and will continue toblink. In order to move your vehicle tothe side of the road, you must followthe system reset procedure.

Customer Action Customer Will See

Note:Each step MUST BE held for at leasttwo seconds

1. Turn ignitionSTOP/OFF/LOCK.(Turn Signal Must beplaced in NeutralState).

2. Turn ignitionMAR/ACC/ON/RUN.

Right turn lightBLINKS.Left turn light is OFF.

3. Turn right turnsignal switch ON.

Right turn light is ONSOLID.Left turn lightBLINKS.

4. Place turn signalin neutral state.

Right turn light isOFF.Left turn lightBLINKS.

117



5. Turn left turnsignal switch ON.

Right turn lightBLINKS.Left turn light is ONSOLID.


Right turn lightBLINKS.Left turn light is OFF.

7. Turn right turnsignal switch ON.

Right turn light is ONSOLID.Left turn lightBLINKS.


Right turn light isOFF.Left turn lightBLINKS.

9. Turn left turnsignal switch ON.

Right turn light is ONSOLID.Left turn light is ONSOLID.

10. Turn left turnsignal switch OFF.(Turn Signal SwitchMust be placed inNeutral State).

Right turn light isOFF.Left turn light is OFF.

11. Turn ignitionSTOP/OFF/LOCK.



12. Turn ignitionMAR/ACC/ON/RUN.(Entire sequenceneeds to becompleted withinone minute orsequence will needto be repeated).

System is now resetand the engine maybe started.

Turn hazard flashersOFF (Manually).

If a reset procedure step is notcompleted within 60 seconds, then theturn signal lights will blink and the resetprocedure must be performed again inorder to be successful.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

Warning!

Modifications to any part of the air bagsystem could cause it to fail when youneed it. You could be injured if the air bagsystem is not there to protect you. Do notmodify the components or wiring, includingadding any kind of badges or stickers tothe steering wheel hub trim cover or theupper right side of the instrument panel.Do not modify the front bumper, vehiclebody structure, or add aftermarket sidesteps or running boards.

It is dangerous to try to repair any partof the air bag system yourself. Be sure totell anyone who works on your vehicle thatit has an air bag system.

Do not attempt to modify any part ofyour air bag system. The air bag may inflateaccidentally or may not function properly ifmodifications are made. Take your vehicleto an authorized dealer for any air bagsystem service. If your seat, including yourtrim cover and cushion, needs to beserviced in any way (including removal orloosening/tightening of seat attachmentbolts), take the vehicle to your authorizeddealer. Only manufacturer approved seataccessories may be used. If it is necessaryto modify the air bag system for personswith disabilities, contact your authorizeddealer.

118

SA

FETY

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certain crashor near crash-like situations, such as anair bag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The EDR is designed torecord data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

How various systems in your vehiclewere operating;

Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.Note: EDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data are recordedby the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data (e.g.,name, gender, age, and crash location)are recorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the information ifthey have access to the vehicle or theEDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to bebuckled up at all times, including babiesand children. Every state in the UnitedStates, and every Canadian province,requires that small children ride inproper restraint systems. This is thelaw, and you can be prosecuted forignoring it.Children 12 years or younger shouldride properly buckled up in a rear seat,if available. According to crashstatistics, children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seatsrather than in the front.

Warning!

In a collision, an unrestrained child canbecome a projectile inside the vehicle.The force required to hold even an infanton your lap could become so great that

you could not hold the child, no matterhow strong you are. The child and otherscould be badly injured. Any child riding inyour vehicle should be in a proper restraintfor the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types ofrestraints for children from newborn sizeto the child almost large enough for anadult safety belt. Always check the childseat Owner’s Manual to make sure youhave the correct seat for your child.Carefully read and follow all theinstructions and warnings in the childrestraint Owner’s Manual and on all thelabels attached to the child restraint.Before buying any restraint system,make sure that it has a label certifyingthat it meets all applicable SafetyStandards. You should also make surethat you can install it in the vehiclewhere you will use it.

Note:

For additional information, refer towww.safercar.gov/parents/index.htmor call:

1–888–327–4236

Canadian residents should referto Transport Canada’s websitefor additional information:http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

119

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Infants and ToddlersChildren who are two years old or youngerand who have not reached the height orweight limits of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible ChildRestraint, facing rearward in the rear seat ofthe vehicle

Small ChildrenChildren who are at least two years old orwho have out-grown the height or weight limitof their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with afive-point Harness, facing forward in the rearseat of the vehicle

Larger ChildrenChildren who have out-grown theirforward-facing child restraint, but are toosmall to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicleseat belt, seated in the rear seat of thevehicle

Children Too Large for Child RestraintsChildren 12 years old or younger, who haveout-grown the height or weight limit of theirbooster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat ofthe vehicle

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that childrenride rear-facing in the vehicle until theyare two years old or until they reacheither the height or weight limit of theirrear-facing child restraint. Two types ofchild restraints can be used rear-facing:infant carriers and convertible child seats.The infant carrier is only used rear-facingin the vehicle. It is recommended forchildren from birth until they reach theweight or height limit of the infant carrier.Convertible child seats can be usedeither rear-facing or forward-facing in thevehicle. Convertible child seats oftenhave a higher weight limit in therear-facing direction than infant carriersdo, so they can be used rear-facing by

children who have outgrown their infantcarrier but are still less than at least twoyears old. Children should remainrear-facing until they reach the highestweight or height allowed by theirconvertible child seat.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deployingpassenger front air bag can cause death orserious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facingchild restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in avehicle with a rear seat.

Older Children And ChildRestraints

Children who are two years old orwho have outgrown their rear-facingconvertible child seat can rideforward-facing in the vehicle.Forward-facing child seats andconvertible child seats used in theforward-facing direction are for childrenwho are over two years old or who haveoutgrown the rear-facing weight orheight limit of their rear-facingconvertible child seat. Children shouldremain in a forward-facing child seatwith a harness for as long as possible,up to the highest weight or heightallowed by the child seat.

120

SA

FETY

All children whose weight or height isabove the forward-facing limit for thechild seat should use a belt-positioningbooster seat until the vehicle’s seatbelts fit properly. If the child cannot sitwith knees bent over the vehicle’s seatcushion while the child’s back is againstthe seatback, they should use abelt-positioning booster seat. The childand belt-positioning booster seat areheld in the vehicle by the seat belt.

Warning!

Improper installation can lead to failureof an infant or child restraint. It could comeloose in a collision. The child could bebadly injured or killed. Follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s directions exactlywhen installing an infant or child restraint.

After a child restraint is installed in thevehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forwardor rearward because it can loosen the childrestraint attachments. Remove the childrestraint before adjusting the vehicle seatposition. When the vehicle seat has beenadjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

When your child restraint is not in use,secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt orLATCH anchorages, or remove it from thevehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.In a sudden stop or accident, it could strikethe occupants or seatbacks and causeserious personal injury.

Children Too Large For BoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wearthe shoulder belt comfortably, andwhose legs are long enough to bendover the front of the seat when theirback is against the seatback, shoulduse the seat belt in a rear seat. Use thissimple 5-step test to decide whetherthe child can use the vehicle’s seat beltalone:

1. Can the child sit all the way backagainst the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the front of the vehicleseat – while they are still sitting all theway back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross thechild’s shoulder between their neck andarm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’s thighs andnot their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this forthe whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questionswas “no,” then the child still needs touse a booster seat in this vehicle. If thechild is using the lap/shoulder belt,check seat belt fit periodically and makesure the seat belt buckle is latched.A child’s squirming or slouching canmove the belt out of position. If theshoulder belt contacts the face or neck,move the child closer to the center ofthe vehicle, or use a booster seat toposition the seat belt on the childcorrectly.

Warning!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder beltunder an arm or behind their back. In acrash, the shoulder belt will not protect achild properly, which may result in seriousinjury or death. A child must always wearboth the lap and shoulder portions of theseat belt correctly.

121

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint TypeCombined Weight

of the Child +Child Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

LATCH – LowerAnchors Only Seat Belt Only

LATCH – LowerAnchors + TopTether Anchor

Seat Belt + TopTether Anchor

Rear-Facing ChildRestraint

Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X X

Rear-Facing ChildRestraint

More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X

Lower Anchors And Tethers ForCHildren (LATCH) RestraintSystem

Your vehicle is equipped with the childrestraint anchorage system calledLATCH, which stands for LowerAnchors and Tethers for CHildren.

The LATCH system has three vehicleanchor points for installingLATCH-equipped child seats. There aretwo lower anchorages located at theback of the seat cushion where it meetsthe seatback and one top tetheranchorage located behind the seatingposition. These anchorages are used toinstall LATCH-equipped child seatswithout using the vehicle’s seat belts.Some seating positions may have a toptether anchorage but no loweranchorages. In these seating positions,the seat belt must be used with the toptether anchorage to install the childrestraint. Please see the following tablefor more information.

LATCH Positions For InstallingChild Restraints In This Vehicle

022668173

LATCH Label 06086S0101NA

LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

122

SA

FETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weightof the child restraint) for using the LATCHanchorage system to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until thecombined weight of the child and the childrestraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat beltand tether anchor instead of the LATCH systemonce the combined weight is more than 65 lbs(29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt beused together to attach a rear-facing orforward-facing child restraint?

No

Do not use the seat belt when you use theLATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facingor forward-facing child restraint.Booster seats may be attached to the LATCHanchorages if allowed by the booster seatmanufacturer. See your booster seat owner’smanual for more information.

Can a child seat be installed in the centerposition using the inner LATCH loweranchorage?

No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install achild seat in the center seating position.

Can two child restraints be attached using acommon lower LATCH anchorage? No

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two ormore child restraints. If the center position doesnot have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,use the seat belt to install a child seat in thecenter position next to a child seat using theLATCH anchorages in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the backof the front passenger seat? Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the frontpassenger seat if the child restraint manufactureralso allows contact. See your child restraintowner’s manual for more information.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All rear passenger head restraints can beremoved.

123

Locating The LATCHAnchorages

The lower anchoragesare round bars that arefound at the rear of theseat cushion where itmeets the seatback,below the anchoragesymbols on the

seatback. They are just visible whenyou lean into the rear seat to install thechild restraint. You will easily feel them ifyou run your finger along the gapbetween the seatback and seatcushion.

Locating The Upper TetherAnchorages

There are tether strapanchorages behindeach rear seatingposition located in thepanel between the rearseatback and the rearwindow. They are

found under a plastic cover with thetether anchorage symbol on it.

LATCH-compatible child restraintsystems will be equipped with a rigidbar or a flexible strap on each side.Each will have a hook or connector toattach to the lower anchorage and away to tighten the connection to theanchorage. Forward-facing childrestraints and some rear-facing child

restraints will also be equipped with atether strap. The tether strap will have ahook at the end to attach to the toptether anchorage and a way to tightenthe strap after it is attached to theanchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

Warning!

Do not install a child restraint in thecenter position using the LATCH system.This position is not approved for installingchild seats using the LATCH attachments.You must use the seat belt and tetheranchor to install a child seat in the centerseating position.

Never use the same lower anchorage toattach more than one child restraint. Pleaserefer to “Installing The LATCH-CompatibleChild Restraint System” for typicalinstallation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the childrestraint manufacturer when installingyour child restraint. Not all child restraintsystems will be installed as describedhere.

06086S0009EM

LATCH Anchorage Locations

1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations

06086S0104NA

Upper Tether Anchorage Location

124

SA

FETY

To Install A LATCH-CompatibleChild Restraint

If the selected seating position has aSwitchable Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seatbelt, following the instructions below.See the section “Installing ChildRestraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”to check what type of seat belt eachseating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lowerstraps and on the tether strap of thechild seat so that you can more easilyattach the hooks or connectors to thevehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between thelower anchorages for that seatingposition. For some second row seats,you may need to recline the seat and/orraise the head restraint to get a betterfit. If the rear seat can be movedforward and rearward in the vehicle, youmay wish to move it to its rear-mostposition to make room for the childseat. You may also move the front seatforward to allow more room for the childseat.

3. Attach the lower hooks orconnectors of the child restraint to thelower anchorages in the selectedseating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tetherstrap, connect it to the top tetheranchorage. See the section “InstallingChild Restraints Using The Top TetherAnchorage” for directions to attach atether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you pushthe child restraint rearward anddownward into the seat. Remove slackin the straps according to the childrestraint manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint isinstalled tightly by pulling back and forthon the child seat at the belt path. Itshould not move more than 1 inch(25.4 mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An UnusedSwitchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attachingsystem to install a child restraint, stowall ALR seat belts that are not beingused by other occupants or being usedto secure child restraints. An unusedbelt could injure a child if they play withit and accidentally lock the seat beltretractor. Before installing a childrestraint using the LATCH system,buckle the seat belt behind the childrestraint and out of the child’s reach. Ifthe buckled seat belt interferes with thechild restraint installation, instead ofbuckling it behind the child restraint,route the seat belt through the childrestraint belt path and then buckle it.

Do not lock the seat belt. Remind allchildren in the vehicle that the seat beltsare not toys and that they should notplay with them.

Warning!

Improper installation of a child restraintto the LATCH anchorages can lead tofailure of the restraint. The child could bebadly injured or killed. Follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s directions exactlywhen installing an infant or child restraint.

Child restraint anchorages are designedto withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly-fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used for adultseat belts, harnesses, or for attaching otheritems or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints UsingThe Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed tobe secured in vehicle seats by lap beltsor the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulderbelt.

Warning!

Improper installation or failure to properlysecure a child restraint can lead to failure ofthe restraint. The child could be badlyinjured or killed.

125

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections exactly when installing an infantor child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seatingpositions are equipped with aSwitchable Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) that is designed tokeep the lap portion of the seat belttight around the child restraint so that itis not necessary to use a locking clip.The ALR retractor can be “switched”into a locked mode by pulling all of thewebbing out of the retractor and thenletting the webbing retract back into theretractor. If it is locked, the ALR will

make a clicking noise while thewebbing is pulled back into theretractor. Refer to the “AutomaticLocking Mode” description in“Switchable Automatic LockingRetractors (ALR)” under “OccupantRestraint Systems” for additionalinformation on ALR.Please see the table below and thefollowing sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems ForInstalling Child Restraints InThis Vehicle

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight ofthe child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor withthe seat belt to attach a forward facing childrestraint?

Weight limit of the Child RestraintAlways use the tether anchor when using the seatbelt to install a forward facing child restraint, up tothe recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the backof the front passenger seat? Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and thechild restraint is allowed, if the child restraintmanufacturer also allows contact.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All rear passenger head restraints can be removed.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seatbelt against the belt path of the child restraint? No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position

with an ALR retractor.

06086S0102NA

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)Locations

ALR = Switchable Automatic LockingRetractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

126

SA

FETY

Installing A Child Restraint WithA Switchable AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed tobe secured in vehicle seats by lap beltsor the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulderbelt.

Warning!

Improper installation or failure to properlysecure a child restraint can lead to failure ofthe restraint. The child could be badlyinjured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections exactly when installing an infantor child restraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center ofthe seating position. For some secondrow seats, you may need to recline theseat and/or raise the head restraint toget a better fit. If the rear seat can bemoved forward and rearward in thevehicle, you may wish to move it to itsrear-most position to make room for thechild seat. You may also move the frontseat forward to allow more room for thechild seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbingfrom the retractor to pass it through thebelt path of the child restraint. Do nottwist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckleuntil you hear a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lapportion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down onthe shoulder part of the belt until youhave pulled all the seat belt webbingout of the retractor. Then, allow thewebbing to retract back into theretractor. As the webbing retracts, youwill hear a clicking sound. This meansthe seat belt is now in the AutomaticLocking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of theretractor. If it is locked, you should notbe able to pull out any webbing. If theretractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excesswebbing to tighten the lap portionaround the child restraint while youpush the child restraint rearward anddownward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tetherstrap and the seating position has a toptether anchorage, connect the tetherstrap to the anchorage and tighten thetether strap. See the section “InstallingChild Restraints Using the Top TetherAnchorage” for directions to attach atether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint isinstalled tightly by pulling back and forthon the child seat at the belt path. Itshould not move more than 1 inch(25.4 mm) in any direction.Any seat belt system will loosen withtime, so check the belt occasionally,and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints UsingThe Top Tether Anchorage:

Warning!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facingcar seat to any location in front of the carseat, including the seat frame or a tetheranchorage. Only attach the tether strap of arear-facing car seat to the tether anchoragethat is approved for that seating position,located behind the top of the vehicle seat.See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” forthe location of approved tether anchoragesin your vehicle.

1. Look behind the seating positionwhere you plan to install the childrestraint to find the tether anchorage.

127

You may need to move the seat forwardto provide better access to the tetheranchorage. If there is no top tetheranchorage for that seating position,move the child restraint to anotherposition in the vehicle if one is available.

2. Rotate or lift the cover to access theanchor directly behind the seat whereyou are placing the child restraint.

3. Route the tether strap to provide themost direct path for the strap betweenthe anchor and the child seat. If yourvehicle is equipped with adjustable rearhead restraints, raise the head restraint,and where possible, route the tetherstrap under the head restraint andbetween the two posts. If not possible,lower the head restraint and pass thetether strap around the outboard side ofthe head restraint.

4. Attach the tether strap hook of thechild restraint to the top tetheranchorage as shown in the diagram.

5. Remove slack in the tether strapaccording to the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

Warning!

An incorrectly anchored tether strapcould lead to increased head motion andpossible injury to the child. Use only theanchorage position directly behind thechild seat to secure a child restraint toptether strap.

If your vehicle is equipped with a splitrear seat, make sure the tether strap doesnot slip into the opening between theseatbacks as you remove slack in thestrap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seatcould harm your pet. An unrestrainedpet will be thrown about and possiblyinjured, or injure a passenger duringpanic braking or in a collision.Pets should be restrained in the rearseat in pet harnesses or pet carriersthat are secured by seat belts.

SAFETY TIPSTransportingPassengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS INTHE CARGO AREA.

Warning!


It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

Warning!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. Theycontain carbon monoxide (CO), which iscolorless and odorless. Breathing it canmake you unconscious and can eventuallypoison you. To avoid breathing (CO), followthese safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garageor in confined areas any longer than neededto move your vehicle in or out of the area.

06086S0104NA

Upper Tether Anchorage Location

128

SA

FETY

If you are required to drive with thetrunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make surethat all windows are closed and the climatecontrol BLOWER switch is set at highspeed. DO NOT use the recirculationmode.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehiclewith the engine running, adjust yourheating or cooling controls to force outsideair into the vehicle. Set the blower at highspeed.

The best protection against carbonmonoxide entry into the vehicle body isa properly maintained engine exhaustsystem.Whenever a change is noticed in thesound of the exhaust system, whenexhaust fumes can be detected insidethe vehicle, or when the underside orrear of the vehicle is damaged, have acompetent mechanic inspect thecomplete exhaust system and adjacentbody areas for broken, damaged,deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.Open seams or loose connectionscould permit exhaust fumes to seepinto the passenger compartment. Inaddition, inspect the exhaust systemeach time the vehicle is raised forlubrication or oil change. Replace asrequired.

Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside TheVehicle

Seat BeltsInspect the seat belt systemperiodically, checking for cuts, frays,and loose parts. Damaged parts mustbe replaced immediately. Do notdisassemble or modify the system.Front seat belt assemblies must bereplaced after a collision. Rear seat beltassemblies must be replaced after acollision if they have been damaged(i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).If there is any question regarding seatbelt or retractor condition, replace theseat belt.

Air Bag Warning LightThe Air Bag warning light will turn onfor four to eight seconds as a bulbcheck when the ignition switch is firstturned to ON/RUN. If the light is eithernot on during starting, stays on, orturns on while driving, have the systeminspected at an authorized dealer assoon as possible. This light willilluminate with a single chime when afault with the Air Bag Warning Light hasbeen detected, it will stay on until thefault is cleared. If the light comes onintermittently or remains on whiledriving, have an authorized dealerservice the vehicle immediately.Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”in “Safety” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrostmode and place the blower control onhigh speed. You should be able to feelthe air directed against the windshield.See your authorized dealer for service ifyour defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fityour vehicle. Only use a floor mat thatdoes not interfere with the operation ofthe pedal assemblies. Only use a floormat that is securely attached using thefloor mat fasteners so it cannot slip outof position and interfere with the pedalassemblies or impair safe operation ofyour vehicle in other ways.

Warning!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded,or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor matfasteners may cause your floor mat tointerfere with the accelerator, brake, orclutch pedals and cause a loss of vehiclecontrol. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY orDEATH:

ALWAYS securely attach your floormat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOTinstall your floor mat upside down or turnyour floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirmmat is secured using the floor matfasteners on a regular basis.

129

ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTINGFLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE

before installing any other floor mat.NEVER install or stack an additional floormat on top of an existing floor mat.

ONLY install floor mats designed to fityour vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat thatcannot be properly attached and securedto your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to bereplaced, only use a FCA approved floormat for the specific make, model, and yearof your vehicle.

ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat onthe driver’s side floor area. To check forinterference, with the vehicle properly parkedwith the engine off, fully depress theaccelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal(if present) to check for interference. If yourfloor mat interferes with the operation of anypedal, or is not secure to the floor, removethe floor mat from the vehicle and place thefloor mat in your trunk.

ONLY use the passenger’s side floor maton the passenger’s side floor area.

ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fallor slide into the driver’s side floor areawhen the vehicle is moving. Objects canbecome trapped under accelerator, brake,or clutch pedals and could cause a loss ofvehicle control.

NEVER place any objects under the floormat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objectscould change the position of the floor matand may cause interference with theaccelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.

If the vehicle carpet has been removedand re-installed, always properly attachcarpet to the floor and check the floor matfasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.Fully depress each pedal to check forinterference with the accelerator, brake, orclutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.

It is recommended to only use mild soapand water to clean your floor mats. Aftercleaning, always check your floor mat hasbeen properly installed and is secured toyour vehicle using the floor mat fastenersby lightly pulling mat.

Periodic Safety ChecksYou Should MakeOutside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wearand uneven wear patterns. Check forstones, nails, glass, or other objectslodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspectthe tread for cuts and cracks. Inspectsidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.Check the wheel nuts for tightness.Check the tires (including spare) forproper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operationof brake lights and exterior lights whileyou work the controls. Check turnsignal and high beam indicator lights onthe instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, andlocking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle afterovernight parking for fuel, coolant, oil,or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasolinefumes are detected or if fuel, or brakefluid leaks are suspected. The causeshould be located and correctedimmediately.

130

SA

FETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, andsee how you can explore its fullestpotential. We’ll look at how to drivesafely in any situation, making it awelcome companion with our comfortand wallets in mind.

STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . .132ENGINE BLOCK HEATER —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE . . . . . . .136AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . .138ALFA DNA SELECTOR . . . . . . . .144ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) —IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146STOP/START SYSTEM . . . . . . . .147SPEED LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . .149ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL(CRUISE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . .150ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL(ACC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .152PARK SENSORS SYSTEM . . . . . .159LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMICGRIDLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . .169VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . .170TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . .171SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING. . . .172

131

STARTING THEENGINEBefore starting the engine, be sure toadjust the seat, the interior rear viewmirrors, and the door mirrors, andfasten the seat belt correctly.Never press the accelerator pedalbefore starting the engine.If necessary, messages indicating thestarting procedure can be shown in thedisplay.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob from the vehicle and lock yourvehicle.


Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seriouslyor fatally injured. Children should be warnednot to touch the parking brake, brake pedalor the transmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to children.A child could operate power windows, othercontrols, or move the vehicle.


Starting Procedure

Proceed as follows:

1. Apply the electric park brake andset the gear selector to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N).

2. Fully depress the brake pedalwithout touching the accelerator.

3. Briefly push the ignition button.

4. If the engine doesn't start within afew seconds, you need to repeat theprocedure.If the problem persists, contact anauthorized dealer.

Warning!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquidinto the throttle body air inlet opening in anattempt to start the vehicle. This couldresult in flash fire causing serious personalinjury.

Do not attempt to push or tow yourvehicle to get it started. Vehicles equippedwith an automatic transmission cannot bestarted this way. Unburned fuel could enterthe catalytic converter and once the enginehas started, ignite and damage theconverter and vehicle.

If the vehicle has a discharged battery,booster cables may be used to obtain astart from a booster battery or the battery

in another vehicle. This type of start can bedangerous if done improperly. Refer to“Emergency Starting” in “In Case OfEmergency” for further information.

Caution!

To prevent damage to the starter, do notcontinuously crank the engine for morethan 25 seconds at a time. Wait60 seconds before trying again.

Remote Starting System— If EquippedThis system uses the key fob to startthe engine conveniently from outsidethe vehicle while still maintainingsecurity. The system has a range of atleast 300 feet (91 meters).The remote starting system also activatesthe climate control (if equipped), theheated seats (if equipped), and theheated steering wheel (if equipped),depending on temperatures outside andinside of the vehicle.

Note:The vehicle must be equipped with

an automatic transmission in order toinclude remote start.

Obstructions between the vehicleand key fob may reduce this range.

132

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

How to use Remote StartAll of the following conditions must bemet before the engine will remote start:

Gear selector in PARK (P).Doors closed.Hood closed.Trunk closed.Hazard switch off.Brake switch inactive (brake pedal

not pressed).Battery at an acceptable charge

level.PANIC button not pushed.System not disabled from previous

remote start event.Vehicle alarm system indicator

flashing.Ignition in the OFF mode (if equipped

with keyless ignition system).Fuel level meets minimum

requirement.

Remote Start Comfort Systems —If EquippedWhen Remote Start is activated, theheated steering wheel and driverheated seat features will automaticallyturn on in cold weather.These features will stay on through theduration of remote start also until theignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode.

Remote Start Windshield WiperDe–Icer Activation — If EquippedWhen remote start is active and theoutside ambient temperature is lessthan 39°F (4°C), the Windshield WiperDe-Icer will be enabled. Exiting remotestart will resume previous operation,except if the Windshield Wiper De-Iceris active.The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer andoperation will continue.

Cold Weather Operation

To prevent possible engine damagewhile starting at low temperatures, thisvehicle will inhibit engine cranking whenthe ambient temperature is less than–22° F (–30° C) and the oil temperaturesensor reading indicates an engineblock heater has not been used. Anexternally-powered electric engineblock heater is available as optionalequipment or from your authorizeddealer.The message “plug in engine heater”will be displayed in the instrumentcluster when the ambient temperatureis below 5° F (–15° C) at the time theengine is shut off as a reminder to avoidpossible crank delays at the next coldstart.

Caution!

Use of the recommended oil and adhering tothe prescribed oil change intervals isimportant to prevent engine damage andensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions.

Extended Park Starting

If the vehicle has not been started ordriven for at least 35 days, it isadvisable to follow the indicationsbelow.To start the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the ignition button

2. If the engine does not start, wait fiveseconds and let the starter cool downand then repeat the starting procedure

3. If the engine does not start aftereight attempts, let the starter cool downfor at least 10 seconds, and then repeatthe starting procedureIf the problem persists, contact yourauthorized dealer.Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity,very difficult starting, that can benoticed through rapid fatigue of thestarter, might also be due to adischarged battery. In this case, see the"Emergency Starting" section in the "InCase Of Emergency" chapter.

133

If Engine Fails To Start

Starting the Engine with Key FobBattery Run Down or DrainedIf the ignition does not respond whenthe button is pushed, the key fobbattery might be run down or drained.Therefore, the system does not detectthe presence of the key fob in thevehicle, and will display a dedicatedmessage.In this case, follow the instructionsoutlined in "Starting With A DischargedKey Fob Battery" in the "Getting ToKnow Your Vehicle" chapter, and startthe engine normally.

Warning!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquidinto the throttle body air inlet opening in anattempt to start the vehicle. This couldresult in flash fire causing serious personalinjury.

Do not attempt to push or tow yourvehicle to get it started. Vehicles equippedwith an automatic transmission cannot bestarted this way. Unburned fuel could enterthe catalytic converter and once the enginehas started, ignite and damage theconverter and vehicle.

If the vehicle has a discharged battery,booster cables may be used to obtain astart from a booster battery or the batteryin another vehicle. This type of start can be

dangerous if done improperly. Refer to“Emergency Starting” in “In Case OfEmergency” for further information.

Caution!

To prevent damage to the starter, do notcontinuously crank the engine for morethan 25 seconds at a time. Wait60 seconds before trying again.

After Starting —Warming Up The Engine

Proceed as follows:Travel slowly, letting the engine run at

a reduced RPM, without acceleratingsuddenly.

It is recommended to wait until thedigital engine coolant temperatureindicator starts to rise for maximumperformance.

Stopping The Engine

To stop the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Park the vehicle in a position that isnot dangerous for oncoming traffic.

2. Engage the PARK (P) mode.

3. With engine idling, push theSTART/STOP button on the steeringwheel to STOP the engine.

Note: Do not leave the ignition in ONmode when the engine is off.To shut off the engine with vehiclespeed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), youmust push and hold the ignition or pushthe START/STOP button three timesconsecutively within a few seconds.The engine will shut down, and theignition will be placed in the ON modeWith the keyless ignition system, it ispossible to go away from the vehicletaking the key fob with you, without theengine switching off. The vehicle willinform about the absence of the key onboard, only if the doors are closed.Stopping the engine (cycling from theON to the STOP position) theaccessories are still powered for aboutthree minutes, or until a door is opened.When the ignition is in the STOP/OFFmode, the window switches remainactive for three minutes. Opening afront door will cancel this function.After severe driving, idle the engine toallow the temperature inside the enginecompartment to cool before shutting offthe engine.

134

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Turbocharger CoolDown

It is recommended before switching thevehicle off, to keep the engine idling fora few minutes so that the turbochargercan be suitably lubricated. Thisprocedure is particularly recommendedafter severe driving.After a full load operation, keep theengine idling for three to five minutesbefore switching it off.This time allows the lubricating oil andthe engine coolant to eliminate theexcessive heat from combustionchamber, bearings, inner componentsand turbocharger.

ENGINE BLOCKHEATER — IFEQUIPPEDThe engine block heater warms theengine and permits quicker starts incold weather.Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt ACelectrical outlet with a grounded,three-wire extension cord.For ambient temperatures below 0°F(-18°C), the engine block heater isrecommended. For ambienttemperatures below -20°F (-29°C), theengine block heater is required.The engine block heater cord is routedunder the hood, behind to the driver’sside headlamp. Follow the steps belowto properly use the engine block heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord(access door on the passenger sidewiper cowl).

2. Pull the cord to the front of thevehicle and plug it into a grounded,three-wire extension cord.

3. After the vehicle is running, properlystow away behind access door on thepassenger side wiper cowl.

Note:

The engine block heater cord is afactory installed option. If your vehicleis not equipped, heater cords areavailable from your authorized dealer.

The engine block heater will require110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activatethe heater element.

The engine block heater must beplugged in at least 1 hour to have awarming effect on the engine and atleast 4 hours to have a warming effectwhen ambient temperatures are below-20 F (-29 C)

Warning!

Remember to disconnect the engine blockheater cord before driving. Damage to the110-115 Volt electrical cord could causeelectrocution.

135

ELECTRIC PARKBRAKEThe vehicle is equipped with electricpark brake to guarantee better use andoptimal performance compared to amanually operated park brake.The electric parking brake features aswitch located on the center console, amotor with caliper for each rear wheel,and an electronic control module.

The electric parking brake can beengaged in two ways:

Manually, by pulling the switch on thecenter console.

Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "AutoPark Brake" conditions.Note: Normally, the electric parkingbrake is engaged automatically whenthe engine is stopped. This function canbe deactivated/activated on theInformation and Entertainment system

by selecting the following items insequence on the main menu:"Settings", "Driver Assistance" and"Automatic Parking Brake".In addition to engaging the electric parkbrake, along with steering andpositioning chocks in front of thewheels (when on a steep slope), youmust always place the vehicle in thePARK (P) mode before leaving.Should the vehicle battery be faulty, thebattery must be replaced in order tounlock the electric park brake.

Engaging The Park Brake ManuallyBriefly pull the switch located on thecenter console to manually engage theelectric park brake when the vehicle isstationary.Noise may be heard from the rear of thevehicle when engaging the electricparking brake.A slight movement of the brake pedalmay be detected when engaging theelectric parking brake with the brakepedal pressed.With the electric parking brakeengaged, the BRAKE warning light onthe instrument panel and the switch willilluminate.

Caution!

With the Electronic Parking Brake failurewarning light on, some functions of theelectric parking brake are deactivated. Inthis case the driver is responsible for brakeactivation and vehicle parking in completesafety conditions.

If, under exceptional circumstances, theuse of the brake is required with thevehicle in motion, keep the switch onthe center console pulled as long as thebrake action is necessary.The BRAKE warning light may turn onwith the hydraulic system temporarilyunavailable, in this case braking iscontrolled by the motors.The brake lights will also automaticallyturn on in the same way as for normalbraking with the use of the brake pedal.Release the switch on the centerconsole to stop the braking action withthe vehicle in motion.If, through this procedure, the vehicle isbraked until a speed below 1.9 mph(3 km/h) is reached and the switch iskept pulled, the park brake willdefinitively engage.Note: Driving the vehicle with theelectric parking brake engaged, orusing it several times to slow down thevehicle, may cause severe damage tothe braking system.

07046S0001EM

Electric Park Brake Switch

136

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Disengaging The Electric ParkBrake ManuallyIn order to manually release the parkbrake, the ignition should be in the ONmode. Press the brake pedal, and thenpush the switch on the center consolebriefly.Noise may be heard from the rear of thevehicle, and a slight movement of thebrake pedal may be detected duringdisengagement.After disengaging the electric parkingbrake, the BRAKE warning light on theinstrument panel and the light on theswitch will turn off.If the BRAKE warning light on theinstrument panel remains on with theelectric parking brake disengaged, thisindicates a fault: in this case, contact anauthorized dealer.

Warning!


Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the park brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle or in a location accessible tochildren. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move thevehicle.

Be sure the park brake is fullydisengaged before driving; failure to do socan lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the park brake whenleaving your vehicle, or it may roll andcause damage or injury.

Caution!

Never use gear position PARK (P) insteadof the electric parking brake. Alwaysengage the electric parking brake whenparking the vehicle to prevent injury ordamage caused by the unexpectedmovement of the vehicle.

Electric Park BrakeOperating Modes

The electric park brake may operate asfollows:

"Dynamic Operating Mode": thismode is activated by pulling the switchrepeatedly while driving.

"Static Engagement and ReleaseMode": with the vehicle stationary, theelectric park brake can be activated bypulling the switch on the center console

once. On the other hand, push theswitch and the brake pedal at the sametime to disengage the brake.

"Drive Away Release" — if equipped:the electric park brake will automaticallydisengage with the driver side seat beltfastened and the detection of an actionperformed by the driver to move thevehicle (forward gear or reverse gear).

"Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed islower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gearselector is not in PARK (P) position andthe driver's intention of leaving thevehicle is detected, the electric parkbrake will automatically engage to holdthe vehicle in safety conditions.

"Auto Park Brake": if the vehiclespeed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), theelectric park brake will automaticallyengage when the gear selector is inPARK (P) position. The light on theswitch located on the center consoleswitches on together with the BRAKEwarning light on the instrument panelwhen the park brake is engaged andapplied to the wheels. Each automaticpark brake engagement can becancelled by pressing the switch on thecenter console and at the same timemoving the gear selector for thetransmission to position PARK (P).

137

Safe Hold

Safe Hold is a safety function thatautomatically engages the electric parkbrake in the event of a dangerouscondition for the vehicle.The electric park brake engagesautomatically to prevent vehiclemovement if:

The vehicle speed is below 2 mph(3 km/h).

A transmission operating modedifferent from PARK (P) is activated.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.The driver side door is open.No attempts to apply pressure on the

brake pedal have been detected.The “Safe Hold” function can betemporarily disabled by pressing theswitch located on the center consoleand the brake pedal at the same time,with the vehicle stationary and thedriver side door open.Once disabled, the function will activateagain when the vehicle speed reaches12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition iscycled to STOP and then to ON.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONThe vehicle can be equipped with anelectronically controlled 8-speedautomatic transmission where gearshifting automatically takes place,depending on the vehicle usageinstantaneous parameters (vehiclespeed, grade, and accelerator pedalposition).The new transmission is an absoluteinnovation, as it can match theStop/Start system with the traditionalautomatic transmissions with built-intorque converter. For furtherinformation, refer to the “Stop/Start”section within this chapter.Manual gear shifting can still occurthanks to the "sequential mode"position for the gear selector.

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gearwhen the engine is idling normally and yourfoot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehiclecould injure those in or near the vehicle.

As with all vehicles, you should never exit avehicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,and turn the ignition STOP/OFF. When theignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, thetransmission is locked in PARK, securingthe vehicle against unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildren to be in a vehicle unattended isdangerous for a number of reasons. A childor others could be seriously or fatally injured.Children should be warned not to touch theparking brake, brake pedal or thetransmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignition inthe AVV or ON mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.

Caution!

Damage to the transmission may occur ifthe following precautions are not observed:

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSEonly after the vehicle has come to acomplete stop.

138

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine isabove idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sureyour foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Display

The following information is shown onthe dedicated area of the display:

In Automatic Mode: the activemode (P, R, N, D) and with "D" thecurrent gear number.

In Manual Drive Mode(Sequential): the mode (M), the currentgear and the double or single gear shiftrequest, both up and down (single ordouble arrow).

Gear Selector

The gear functioning is controlled by thegear selector, which can assume thefollowing positions:

P = PARKR = REVERSEN = NEUTRALD = DRIVE, (automatic forward

speed)AutoStick: + manually shift to higher

gear; – manually shift to lower gearThe positions diagram is illustrated onthe top of the gear selector.

The letter corresponding to the modeselected on the gear selector lights upand appears on the instrument clusterdisplay.

To select a mode, move the gearselector forward or backwards,together with pressing the brake pedaland button to engage REVERSE (R).

The gear selector is a joystick styleshifting mechanism which returns to thecenter position automatically. It can bepushed forward twice and rearwardtwice, based on the starting condition.The PARK (P) mode can beenabled/disabled by pushing the PARK(P) button.To transition the vehicle into REVERSE(R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or intoDRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R)mode, it is necessary to move the gearselector by pushing the gear selectorbutton.

07076S0001EM

Gear Display

07076S0002EM

Gear Selector Center Console

1 — Gear Selector2 — PARK (P) Button

07076S0005EM

Gear Selector

3 — Gear Selector Button

139

When using AutoStick, activate it bymoving the gear selector from DRIVE(D) to the left and then forward towardthe - symbol or backward toward the +symbol and the gear is changed.To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass fromposition NEUTRAL (N) to positionDRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehiclemust be moving at a low speed orstopped, and the brake pedal must alsobe pressed.

Note:

DO NOT accelerate while shiftingfrom position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL(N) to another position.

After selecting a gear, wait a fewseconds before accelerating. Thisprecaution is particularly important withengine cold.

Transmission OperatingModes

PARK (P)The transmission is locked in this mode.The engine can be started in this mode.Note: Never try to engage PARK (P)mode when the vehicle is moving.Before leaving the vehicle, make surethis mode is engaged (letter P shownon the display and gear selector) andthat the park brake is engaged.When parking on a flat surface, firstengage the PARK (P) mode and thenengage the electric park brake.

When parking uphill, before activatingthe PARK (P) mode, engage the electricpark brake. Otherwise, it could bedifficult to engage the (P) mode.To check that the PARK (P) mode isactually engaged, make sure (P) isilluminated on the display and on thegear selector.

Warning!

Never use the PARK position as asubstitute for the park brake. Always applythe park brake fully when parked to guardagainst vehicle movement and possibleinjury or damage.

Your vehicle could move and injure youand others if it is not in PARK. Check bytrying to move the gear selector out ofPARK with the brake pedal released. Makesure the transmission is in PARK beforeleaving the vehicle.

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gearwhen the engine is idling normally and yourfoot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehiclecould injure those in or near the vehicle.As with all vehicles, you should never exita vehicle while the engine is running.

Before exiting a vehicle, always apply thepark brake, shift the transmission intoPARK, and turn the ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in the STOP/OFFmode, the transmission is locked in PARK,securing the vehicle against unwantedmovement.


Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildren to be in a vehicle unattended isdangerous for a number of reasons. A childor others could be seriously or fatally injured.Children should be warned not to touch thepark brake, brake pedal or the transmissiongear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignition in theON mode. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Caution!

Before moving the transmission gearselector out of PARK, you must push theignition button to cycle from STOP/OFFmode to the ON mode, and also press thebrake pedal. Otherwise, damage to thegear selector could result.

140

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

DO NOT race the engine when shiftingfrom PARK or NEUTRAL into another gearrange, as this can damage the drivetrain.

REVERSE (R)Select this mode only with the vehicle ata standstill.

NEUTRAL (N)Use this range when the vehicle isstanding for prolonged periods with theengine running. The engine may bestarted in this range. Apply the electricpark brake and shift the transmission intoPARK (P) if you must leave the vehicle.

Warning!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turnoff the ignition to coast down a hill.These are unsafe practices that limit yourresponse to changing traffic or roadconditions. You might lose control of thevehicle and have a collision.

DRIVE (D)Use this mode in normal drivingconditions.Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) orREVERSE (R) modes must take placeonly after releasing the acceleratorpedal, with vehicle at a standstill andbrake pedal pressed.

This mode ensures automaticengagement of the most suitable gearsfor driving needs and maximum fueleconomy in terms of consumption.In this position, the transmission shiftsthe gears automatically, selecting themost suitable for forward driving amongthose available as you go. In this way thevehicle's optimal driving characteristicsare provided for all conditions.

AutoStickIn the case of frequent shifting (e.g. forsport driving, when the vehicle is drivenwith a heavy load, on slopes, whentowing heavy trailers), it is recommendedto use the Autostick (sequential shifting)mode to select and keep a lower fixedratio.In these conditions, the use of a lowergear improves vehicle performance,preventing overheating.It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D)mode to sequential mode regardless ofvehicle speed.

ActivationStarting from DRIVE (D), move theselector to the left (– and + indication ofthe trim) to activate the sequential drivemode. The gear engaged will be shownon the display.Shifting is made by moving the gearselector forwards, towards symbol – orbackwards, towards symbol +.

Steering Wheel Shift Paddles —If EquippedThe gear can also be manually shiftedby using the paddles behind thesteering wheel. Pull the right paddle (+)toward the steering wheel and release itto engage a higher gear, and performthe same operation with the left paddle(-) to engage a lower gear.

Note: If only one manual shift isnecessary, the letter (D) will remain onthe display with the engaged gear nextto it.

DeactivationTo deactivate the sequential drivingmode, bring the gear selector back inposition DRIVE (D) ("automatic" drivingmode).

07076S0006EM

Steering Wheel Shift Paddles

141

Warning!

Do not downshift for additional enginebraking on a slippery surface. The drivewheels could lose their grip and the vehiclecould skid, causing a collision or personalinjury.

Note:To select the correct gear for

maximum deceleration (engine brake),just keep the gear paddle pulled (–):the transmission goes to an operatingmode in which the vehicle can slowdown easily.

The vehicle will keep the gearselected by the driver until the safetyconditions allow it.

This means, for example, that thesystem will try to prevent the enginefrom switching off, automaticallydownshifting if the engine speed is toolow.

Automatic TransmissionLimp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitoredelectronically for abnormal conditions.If a condition is detected that couldresult in transmission damage,Transmission Limp Home Mode isactivated.

In this condition, the transmission staysin fourth gear, regardless of the selectedgear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R)and NEUTRAL (N) still work.The symbol might light up in theinstrument cluster.

Temporary failureIn the event of a momentary problem,the transmission can be reset to regainall forward gears by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P),if possible. If not, shift the transmissionto NEUTRAL (N).

3. Push and hold the ignition until theengine turns OFF.

4. Wait for about 10 seconds, thenrestart the engine.

5. Shift into the desired gear range.If the problem is no longer detected,the transmission will return to normaloperation.Note: Even if the transmission can bereset, we recommend that you visit yourauthorized dealer at your earliestpossible convenience. Your authorizeddealer has diagnostic equipment todetermine if the problem could reoccur.If the transmission cannot be reset,service is required at your authorizeddealer.

Brake/TransmissionShift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a BrakeTransmission Shift Interlock system(BTSI) that holds the gear selector inPARK (P) unless the brakes are applied.This system prevents you from movingthe gear selector from position PARK(P) unless the brakes are applied.To shift the transmission out of PARK(P), the ignition must be cycled to theAVV mode (engine running or not) andthe brake pedal must be pressed.

Brake/Transmission Shift InterlockDisablingOnly if strictly necessary (e.g. pushingthe vehicle, conveyor vehicle washingsystems) inhibit the automatic activationof PARK (P) mode when stopping theengine, or proceed as described below:

1. Vehicle at a standstill.

2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated.

3. Push the ignition button for at leastthree seconds.The automatic park brake engagementfunction when the engine is stoppedcan also be deactivated on theInformation and Entertainment systemby selecting the following functions onthe main menu: "Settings", "DriverAssistance" and "Automatic ParkingBrake".

142

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Important Notes

Failure to comply with what is reportedbelow may damage the transmission:

Shift into PARK (P) mode only withthe vehicle at a standstill.

Select REVERSE (R) mode, or passfrom REVERSE to another mode onlywith the vehicle at a standstill andengine idling.

Do not change between PARK (P),REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE(D) modes with engine running at aspeed above idling.

Before activating any transmissionoperating mode, fully depress the brakepedal.Note: The unexpected movement ofthe vehicle can injure the occupants orpeople nearby. Do not leave the vehiclewith engine running: before getting outof the passenger compartment alwaysengage the electric park brake, selectthe PARK (P) mode, stop the engine.

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.

You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gearwhen the engine is idling normally and yourfoot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehiclecould injure those in or near the vehicle.As with all vehicles, you should never exit avehicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,and turn the ignition STOP/OFF. When theignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, thetransmission is locked in PARK, securingthe vehicle against unwanted movement.


Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the transmission gearselector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignition inthe AVV or ON mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.

Caution!

Only engage the gear with engine atidling while fully depressing the brakepedal. If the transmission temperatureexceeds the normal operating limits, thetransmission control unit may change thegear engagement order and reduce thedrive torque. If the transmission overheats,it could operate incorrectly until it coolsdown.

When using the vehicle with extremelylow external temperatures, the transmissionoperation may change depending on theengine and transmission temperature, aswell as vehicle speed. Activation of thetorque converter clutch and of the eighthgear is inhibited until the transmission oil iscorrectly warmed up. Complete operation ofthe transmission will be enabled as soon asthe fluid temperature reaches the predefinedvalue.

143

ALFA DNASELECTORAlfa DNA System

This vehicle is equipped with an AlfaDNA system selector (located on thecenter console). There are four modesof operation to be selected accordingto driving style and road conditions:

d = Dynamic (sports driving mode).n = Natural (mode for driving in

normal conditions).a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving

mode for maximum fuel savings).= Adjusts the calibration of the

active suspension (if equipped).The symbol of the active mode lights upin red on the selector.

On the instrument panel display, thedifferent modes are characterized bydifferent colors:

Natural - BlueDynamic - RedAdvanced Efficiency - Green

Each driving mode is graphicallydifferent in frame color and contents ofeach individual "performance" screen.

Driving Modes

"Natural" Mode“Natural” Mode is characterized byreduced engine performance and ECOshifting strategy for the automatictransmission.

ActivationIt is activated by rotating the selector tothe letter "n", the displays light up in blue.

The "Performance" screen graphicallyreproduces some parameters closelylinked to the efficiency of the drivingstyle, with a view to limiting consumption.

07076S0004BASE

Alfa DNA System Selector

07076S0003EM

Mode Display

07116S0002EM

Natural Mode

07116S0001EM

Natural Mode Performance Display

144

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

"Dynamic" Mode

ActivationIt is activated by rotating the selector tothe letter "d", the displays light up in red.

ESC and ASR systems: interventionthresholds that ensure more enjoyable,sportier driving while guaranteeing thestability of the vehicle.Engine and transmission: adoption ofsports mapping.

Warning!

In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of theaccelerator pedal increases considerably.Consequently, driving is less fluid andcomfortable.

The "Performance" screen displaysparameters related to vehicle stability,the graphs illustrate the trend of thelongitudinal/lateral accelerations(G-meter information), consideringgravity acceleration as a reference unit.Lateral acceleration peaks are displayedon the right.

"Advanced Efficiency" ModeActivationIt is activated by rotating the selector tothe letter "a", the displays light up ingreen.

ESC and ASR systems: interventionthresholds aimed at ensuring maximumsafety in low-grip driving conditions. It isadvisable to select "AdvancedEfficiency" mode in the presence oflow-grip road surfaces.Engine and transmission: standardresponse.

07116S0003EM

Dynamic Mode

07116S0006EM

Dynamic Mode Performance Display

07116S0005EM

Advanced Efficiency Mode

145

The "Performance" screen graphicallydisplays some parameters closelyrelated to the vehicle consumption.

Driving Mode DeactivationTo deactivate any driving mode, simplymove the selector to any other mode.

Note:When the engine is next started, the

"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and"Natural" mode selected previously isretained. The system will reactivate in"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or"Natural" mode, depending on whichmode was selected before the enginewas stopped.

When the engine is next started, the"Race" mode selected previously isnot retained. The system will reactivatein "Dynamic" mode.

It is not possible to go directly from"Dynamic" mode to "AdvancedEfficiency" mode and vice versa. Youmust always activate the “Natural”mode first and then select the othermode.

ALFA ACTIVESUSPENSION (AAS)— IF EQUIPPEDThe vehicle's electronic suspensionsmanagement system is the result of asophisticated elaboration of the variousboard sensors, aimed at optimizing thevehicle's performance.The system continuously monitors thedamping of the suspensions throughthe actuator installed on each shockabsorber. This way, the calibration ofthe shock absorbers can be adjusted tothe conditions of the road surface andto the dynamic conditions of thevehicle, improving its comfort and roadholding.The driver can choose, even whiledriving, (only in "Dynamic” mode),between two types of suspensioncalibration: a more sporty or a morecomfortable one.By pressing the button, the systemprepares to work with a shock absorbercalibration which favours drivingcomfort.

07116S0008EM

Advanced Efficiency ModePerformance Display

146

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

In case of a system failure, the symboland a dedicated message will be

shown on the instrument panel display.

STOP/STARTSYSTEMStop/Start System

The Stop/Start system automaticallyshuts off the engine during a vehiclestop if the required conditions are met.Releasing the brake pedal oraccelerator pedal will automaticallyrestart the engine.The function was developed to increasevehicle efficiency by reducing fuelconsumption, gas emissions, andsound pollution.

Operating Mode

Stopping the EngineWith vehicle at a standstill and brakepedal pressed, the engine switches offif the gear selector is in a position otherthan REVERSE (R).The system does not operate when thegear selector is in REVERSE (R), inorder to making parking maneuverseasier.In the event of stops uphill, engineswitching off is disabled to make the"Hill Start Assist" function available(works only with running engine).

NOTE: The engine can only beautomatically stopped after having runat about 6 mph (10 km/h). After anautomatic restart, the vehicle onlyneeds to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph(0.5 km/h) to stop the engine.Engine stopping is signaled by the

symbol lighting up on the instrumentcluster display.

Restarting the EngineTo restart the engine, release the brakepedal.With brake pressed, if the gear selectoris in automatic mode - DRIVE (D) - theengine can be restarted by moving thegear selector to REVERSE (R) orNEUTRAL (N) or "AutoStick".With brake pressed, if the gear selectoris in "AutoStick" mode, the engine canbe restarted by moving the gearselector to "+" or "–", or REVERSE (R)or NEUTRAL (N).When the engine has been stoppedautomatically, keeping the brake pedalpressed, the brake can be releasedkeeping the engine off by quicklyshifting the gear selector to PARK (P).To restart the engine, just move thegear selector out of a position otherthan PARK (P).

04306S0001BASE

“Alfa DNA” System Selector

147

System ManualActivation/Deactivation

To manually activate/deactivate thesystem, push the button located in thecontrol panel on the left of the steeringwheel.

System ActivationThe activation of the system is indicatedby the symbol lighting up on thedisplay. In this condition, the light on thebutton is off.

System DeactivationA message will appear on the displaywhen the system is deactivated. In thiscondition, the light on the button is on.Note: Each time the engine is started,the system is activated regardless ofwhere was when it was previouslyswitched off.

Possible Reasons TheEngine Does NotAutostop

For higher comfort and increasedsafety, and to reduce emissions, thereare certain conditions where the enginewill not autostop despite the systembeing active, such as:

Engine still cold.Especially cold outside temperature.Battery not sufficiently charged.Driver's door not shut.Driver's seat belt not fastened.Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for

parking maneuvers).With the automatic climate control

active, an adequate cabin heating orcooling comfort has not been reachedor with MAX-DEF function active.

During the first period of use, toinitialize the system.

Steering angle beyond threshold.

Engine RestartingConditions

Due to comfort, emission control andsafety reasons, the engine can restartautomatically without any action by thedriver, under special conditions, suchas:

Battery not sufficiently charged.Reduced braking system vacuum

(e.g. if the brake pedal is pressedrepeatedly).

Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving onroads with a grade).

Engine stopping by the Stop/Startsystem for more than approx. threeminutes.

With the automatic climate controlactive, an adjustment in cabin heatingor cooling is made or with MAX-DEFfunction active.

Safety Functions

When the engine is stopped throughthe Stop/Start system, if the driverreleases their seat belt, opens thedriver's or passenger's door, or opensthe hood from inside the vehicle, theengine can be restarted only by usingthe ignition.This condition is indicated to the driverboth through a buzzer and a messageon the instrument cluster display.

Irregular Operation

In the event of malfunction, theStop/Start system is deactivated.For failure indications, see the "WarningLights and Messages" paragraph,"Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel" chapter.

Vehicle Inactivity

In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if thebattery is replaced), special attentionmust be paid to the disconnection ofthe battery power supply.

07126S0051EM

Stop/Start Button

148

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Proceed as follows:Remove connector from socket todisconnect sensor (battery statusmonitoring) installed on the negativepole of the battery. This sensor shouldnever be disconnected from the poleexcept if the battery is replaced.

Note: After setting the ignition to STOPand having closed the driver side door,wait at least one minute beforedisconnecting the electrical supply fromthe battery. When reconnecting theelectrical supply to the battery, makesure that the ignition is in the STOPmode and the driver side door isclosed.

SPEED LIMITERDescription

This feature allows the speed of thevehicle to be limited to speeds, whichcan be set by the driver.The maximum speed can be set withthe vehicle stationary or in motion. Theminimum speed that can be set is18 mph (30mk/h).When this feature is active, the vehiclespeed depends on the pressing of theaccelerator pedal until the programmedspeed limit is reached (see "Speed LimitProgramming" paragraph).

Activating The Device

The feature can be activated/deactivated through the Informationand Entertainment System.

Activating The DeviceTo access this feature on the mainmenu, select the following items insequence: "Settings", "Safety", “SpeedLimiter” and “ON”.The activation of this feature is signaledby the displaying of the green symbolalong with the last speed set. TheSpeed Limiter feature can remain activeconcurrently with the Speed Controlsystem. If a speed limit below the oneindicated in the Speed Control isselected, the Speed Control speed willbe lowered to that of the Speed Limiter.This function remains available in RACEmode.

Speed LimitProgramming

The speed limit can be programmedthrough the Information andEntertainment System.To access the function on the mainmenu, select the following items insequence: "Settings", "Safety" and"Speed Limiter Set Speed".By turning the Rotary Pad, the speedincreases by 5 mph (5 km/h), from aminimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to amaximum of 112 mph (180 km/h).

Exceeding TheProgrammed Speed

By fully pressing the accelerator pedal,the programmed speed can beexceeded even with the device active(e.g. in the event of overtaking).The device is disabled until the speeddrops below the set limit, after which itreactivates automatically.

07126S0002EM

Battery Power Supply

1 — Socket2 — Sensor3 — Connector

07136S0001EM

Speed Limiter Display

149

Programmed SpeedIcon Flashing

The programmed speed will flash in thefollowing scenarios:

When the accelerator pedal has beenfully pressed and the vehicle hasexceeded the programmed speed.

Activating the system after setting alimit below the effective speed of thevehicle.

In the event of overtake acceleration.

Deactivating The Device

The feature can be activated/deactivated through the Informationand Entertainment System.

Deactivating The DeviceTo access this feature on the mainmenu, select the following items insequence: "Settings", "Safety", “SpeedLimiter” and “OFF”.

Automatic Deactivation Of The DeviceThe device deactivates automatically inthe event of fault in the system. In thiscase, contact an authorized dealer.

Temporary Signal LossWhen the devices loses the signal, thewhite symbol without the speedindication illuminates on the display.

System FailureIf there is a system failure, the ambersymbol illuminates on the display.

ELECTRONICSPEED CONTROL(CRUISE CONTROL)Electronic SpeedControl Description

This is an electronically controlleddriving assistance feature that allowsthe desired vehicle speed to bemaintained, without having to press theaccelerator pedal. This feature can beused at a speed above 25 mph(40 km/h) on long stretches of dry,straight roads with few variations(highways).The speed control buttons are locatedon the left side of the steering wheel.

Note:

To ensure correct operation, thespeed control is designed todeactivate if more than one function isoperated simultaneously. In this case,the system can be reactivated bypushing the on/off button andsetting the desired speed.

It is not recommended to use thisfeature in city traffic.

While driving downhill, the system couldbrake the vehicle to keep the set speedthe same.

Warning!

Speed Control can be dangerous wherethe system cannot maintain a constantspeed. Your vehicle could go too fast forthe conditions, and you could lose controland have an accident. Do not use SpeedControl in heavy traffic or on roads that arewinding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

Activating

To activate the Electronic Speed ControlSystem, push the on/off button locationon the left side of the steering wheel.

The activation of the system is signaledby the white warning light illuminatingin the instrument cluster display.

07146S0001EM

Electronic Speed Control On/OffSwitch

150

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

The Electronic Speed Control functioncan remain active at the same time asthe Speed Limiter System. If a speedlimit below the one indicated in the setspeed control, the speed control speedwill be lowered to that of the SpeedLimiter.Note: The system cannot be engagedin FIRST or REVERSE gear. It isadvisable to engage it in THIRD gear orhigher if using the Autostick feature.

Warning!

Leaving the Speed Control system onwhen not in use is dangerous. You couldaccidentally set the system or cause it togo faster than you want. You could losecontrol and have an accident. Always leavethe system OFF when you are not using it.

Setting The DesiredSpeed

To set a desired speed, proceed asfollows:

1. Turn the Electronic Speed Control on.

2. When the vehicle has reached thedesired speed, push the SET switch upor down and release to activate. Whenthe accelerator is released, the vehiclewill keep the selected speedautomatically.

If needed (when overtaking forinstance), you can accelerate beyondthe set speed by pressing theaccelerator. When you release thepedal, the vehicle goes back to thepreviously set speed.When traveling downhill with the systemactive, the vehicle speed may slightlyexceed the set one.Note: Before pushing the SET switch,the vehicle must be traveling at aconstant speed on a flat surface.

Increasing/DecreasingSpeed

Increasing SpeedOnce the Electronic Speed Control hasbeen activated, the speed can beincreased by pushing the SET switchupward.

By keeping the button pushed, the setspeed will increase until the button isreleased. The new speed will then beset.At every movement of the SET switch,the set speed can be adjusted.

Decreasing SpeedWhen the feature is active, to reducethe speed, push the SET switchdownward.By keeping the button pushed, the setspeed will decrease until the button isreleased. The new speed will then beset.At every movement of the SET switch,the set speed can be adjusted.Note: Moving the SET switch allows toadjust the speed according to theselected unit of measurement set onthe Information and EntertainmentSystem (see dedicated supplement).

Accelerating When OvertakingPress the accelerator as you wouldnormally. When the pedal is released,the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Use Of The Feature On Hilly RoutesThe feature can automatically downshiftto keep the set speed when driving onhilly routes.On steep grades, the loss or gain inspeed may be considerable and isadvisable to deactivate the ElectronicSpeed Control.

07146S0002EM

Set Switch Location

151

Note: The feature keeps the speed seteven uphill and downhill. A slightvariation in the speed on slight rises iscompletely normal.

Recalling The SpeedNote: Before returning to thepreviously set speed, you mustaccelerate to a speed close to thatspeed, then push the RES button andrelease it.

While in DRIVE (D), push and releasethe RES button to recall the previouslyset speed.

In Autostick (sequential) mode, beforerecalling the previously set speed, youshould accelerate until you are close tothat speed. Then, push and release theRES button.

Deactivating

Lightly pressing the brake pedaldeactivates the speed control withoutdeleting the set speed.The speed control may also bedeactivated by applying the electricpark brake or when the braking systemis operated (e.g. operation of the ESCsystem).The set speed is deleted in thefollowing cases:

Pushing the on/off button twice.

The ignition is cycled to the STOPposition

If there is a malfunction with theElectronic Speed Control.

ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL (ACC) —IF EQUIPPEDSystem Description

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is adriver assist system that combines thespeed control functions for controllingthe distance from the vehicle ahead.The system allows to set and hold thevehicle at the desired speed withoutneeding to press the accelerator. It alsoallows to set and hold a distance fromthe vehicle ahead (these settings are setby the driver).The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) usesa radar sensor located behind the frontbumper and a camera located in thecenter/upper part of the windshield, todetect the presence of a vehicle closeahead.

07146S0003EM

Resume Button Location

06016S0003EM

Front Bumper Radar Location

152

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

This system enhances driving comfortwhile on the highway or out of townwith light traffic.If the sensor does not detect a vehicleahead, the system will maintain a fixedset speed.If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead,the device automatically intervenes bybraking (or accelerating) slightly in ordernot to exceed the original set speed, sothat the vehicle keeps the presetdistance, seeking to adapt to the speedof the vehicle ahead.Note: Adaptive Cruise Controlperformance is not guaranteed underthe following circumstances, and it isrecommended to turn the system offwhen:

Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow

Driving in heavy traffic orconstruction zones

Driving on icy, snowy, slipperyroads, roads with steep climbs anddescents, or roads with numerousturns and bends

Entering a turn lane

Towing a trailer

When circumstances do not allowsafe driving at a constant speed

Warning!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is aconvenience system. It is not a substitutefor active driving involvement. It is alwaysthe driver’s responsibility to be attentive ofroad, traffic, and weather conditions,vehicle speed, distance to the vehicleahead; and, most importantly, brakeoperation to ensure safe operation of thevehicle under all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention is always required whiledriving to maintain safe control of yourvehicle. Failure to follow these warningscan result in a collision and death orserious personal injury.

The ACC system:

Does not react to pedestrians,oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects(e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or adisabled vehicle).

Cannot take street, traffic, and weatherconditions into account, and may belimited upon adverse sight distanceconditions.

Does not always fully recognize complexdriving conditions, which can result inwrong or missing distance warnings.

Will bring the vehicle to a complete stopwhile following a target vehicle and hold thevehicle for approximately 3 minutes in thestop position. If the target vehicle does notstart moving within 3 minutes the parkingbrake will be activated, and the ACCsystem will be canceled.You should switch off the ACC system:

When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavysnow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complexdriving situations (i.e., in highwayconstruction zones).

When entering a turn lane or highwayoff ramp; when driving on roads that arewinding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, orhave steep uphill or downhill slopes.

When circumstances do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.

Activation/Deactivation

The system has four operating states:

Enabled (speed not set)

Activated (speed set)

Paused

Deactivated

06016S0004EM

Windshield Camera Location

153

Enabling/ActivatingTo enable the system, push and releasethe button located on the left side onthe steering wheel.

When the system is enabled and readyto operate, the display shows the whiteicon above dashes in place of the speed.

Setting a speed activates the system.The display shows the icon in greenwith the set speed.

Warning!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)system on when not in use is dangerous.You could accidentally set the system orcause it to go faster than you want. Youcould lose control and have a collision.Always leave the system off when you arenot using it.

Pausing/DeactivatingWith the feature enabled (speed notset), push the (on/off) button todisable.With the feature active (speed set),push the (on/off) button to pause.The display will show the icon in whitewith the speed in brackets. To thendeactivate the feature, push the

(on/off) button again.

Setting The DesiredSpeed

The speed can be set from a minimumof 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of110 mph (180 km/h).When the vehicle reaches the desiredspeed, push the SET switch upward ordownward and release it to activate thesystem. When the accelerator isreleased, the vehicle will maintain theset speed automatically.

While the accelerator pedal is pressed,the system will not be able to controlthe distance between the vehicle andthe one ahead. In this case, the speedwill be determined only by the positionof the accelerator pedal.The system will return to normaloperation as soon as the acceleratorpedal is released.The system cannot be set:

When pressing the brake pedal.

When the brakes are overheated.

When the electric park brake hasbeen operated.

When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R)or NEUTRAL (N) is engaged.

When the engine rpm is above amaximum threshold.

When the vehicle speed is not withinthe operational speed range.

07146S0010EM

On/Off Button

07146S0016EM

Enabled Icons

07146S0017EM

SET Switch

154

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

When the ESC (or ABS or otherstability control systems) are operatingor have just operated.

When the ESC system is off.

When the Forward Collision Warningsystem (if equipped) is brakingautomatically.

In the event of system failure.

When the engine is OFF.

In case of obstruction of the radarsensor (in this case the bumper areawhere it is located must be cleaned).If the system is set, the conditionsdescribed above also cause acancellation or deactivation of thesystem. These situations may varyaccording to the conditions.Note: The system will not bedeactivated when speeds higher thanthose set are reached by pressing theaccelerator pedal above 110 mph(180 km/h). In these situations, thesystem may not work correctly and it isrecommended to deactivate it.

To Vary The SpeedSetting

Increasing SpeedOnce the system has been activated,you can increase the speed by lifting theSET switch. Each time it is operated, thespeed increases by 1 mph.

By holding the button up, the set speedwill increase in increments of 5 mphuntil the button is released. Then, thenew speed will be set.

Decreasing SpeedOnce the system has been activated,you can decrease the speed by loweringthe SET switch. Each time it is operated,the speed decreases by 1 mph.By holding the button down, the setspeed will decrease in increments of5 mph until the button is released.Then, the new speed will be set.

Note:

Moving the SET switch allows youto adjust the speed according to theselected unit of measurement ("US" or"metric") set on the Information andEntertainment System (see dedicatedsupplement)

When the unit of measurement isset to metric, holding the SET switchthe speed will change in 10 km/hincrements

By keeping the accelerator pedaldepressed, the vehicle can continue toaccelerate beyond the set speed. In thiscase, use the SET switch to set thespeed to the vehicle’s current speed

When you push the SET button toreduce the speed, the braking systemintervenes automatically if the enginebrake does not slow the vehicle down

sufficiently to reach the set speed. Thedevice holds the set speed uphill anddownhill; however a slight variation isentirely normal, particularly on slightinclines

The transmission could change to alower gear when driving downhill, orwhen accelerating. This is normal andnecessary to maintain the set speed

The system will disable while drivingif the brakes overheat

Accelerating WhenOvertaking

When driving with ACC activated andfollowing a vehicle, the system willprovide an additional acceleration up tothe ACC set speed to assist in passingthe vehicle. This additional accelerationis triggered when the driver utilizes theleft turn signal and will only be activewhen passing on the left hand side.The system detects the direction oftraffic automatically when the vehiclepasses from left-hand traffic toright-hand traffic. In this case, theovertaking assist function is only activewhen the reference vehicle is overtakenon the right. The additional accelerationis deactivated when the driver uses theright direction indicator and returns tothe original lane.

155

Resuming The Speed

Once the system has been canceledbut not deactivated, to resume apreviously set speed, simply push theRES button and remove your foot fromthe accelerator to recall it.The system will be set to the last storedspeed.

Before returning to the previously setspeed, bring the speed close to thatvalue, then push the RES button andrelease it.

Warning!

The Resume function should only be usedif traffic and road conditions permit.Resuming a set speed that is too high ortoo low for prevailing traffic and roadconditions could cause the vehicle to

accelerate or decelerate too sharply forsafe operation. Failure to follow thesewarnings can result in a collision and deathor serious personal injury.

Setting The DistanceBetween Vehicles

The distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle ahead may be set to onebar (short), two bars (medium), threebars (long), or four bars (maximum).

The distances from the vehicle aheadare proportional to speed.The interval of time with relation to thevehicle ahead remains constant andvaries from one second (for the shortdistance one-bar setting) to twoseconds (for the maximum distancefour-bar setting).The set distance is shown on thedisplay by a dedicated icon.

The setting is four (maximum) the firsttime the system is used. After thedistance has been modified by thedriver, the new distance will be storedalso after the system is deactivated andreactivated.

To Decrease The DistancePush and release the distance button todecrease the distance setting. Thedistance setting decreases by one bar(shorter) every time the button is pushed.

The set speed is held if there are novehicles ahead. Once the shortestdistance has been selected, the nextpush of the button will set themaximum distance.If a slower vehicle is detected in thesame lane, the vehicle icon on thedisplay illuminates from grey to white.The system automatically adjusts thevehicle’s speed to keep the set distance,independently of the set speed.

07146S0018EM

RES (Resume) Button

07146S0019EM

Distance Icons07146S0015EM

Distance Button

156

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

The vehicle holds the set distance until:The vehicle ahead accelerates to a

speed higher than the set speed.The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or

the detection field of the AdaptiveCruise Control system sensor.

The distance setting is changed.The Adaptive Cruise Control system

is deactivated/paused.

Warning!

The maximum breaking applied by thesystem is limited. The driver may apply thebrakes in all cases if needed.

If the system predicts that the brakinglevel is insufficient to hold the set distance,either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message isdisplayed to warn the driver of approachingthe vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal isalso emitted. In this case, it is advised tobrake immediately as necessary to hold asafe distance from the vehicle ahead.

The driver is responsible for ensuringthat there are no pedestrians, othervehicles or objectives along the direction ofthe vehicle. Failure to comply with theseprecautions may cause serious accidentsand injuries.

The driver is fully responsible for holdinga safe distance from the vehicle aheadrespecting the highway code in force in therespective country.

“Stop And Go” Function

The “Stop and Go” operating strategyallows you to maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle ahead until the vehiclehas completely stopped. It will alsorestart the vehicle automatically if thevehicle ahead drives away within twoseconds, otherwise it is necessary topress the accelerator pedal or push theRES button to restart.

Warning!

When the ACC system is resumed, thedriver must ensure that there are nopedestrians, vehicles or objects in the pathof the vehicle. Failure to follow thesewarnings can result in a collision and deathor serious personal injury.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated and the setspeed is canceled if:

The (on/off) button is pushed(when the system is on or paused).

The ignition is cycled to STOP.The system is canceled (the set speedand distance are stored):

When the system is paused (Refer tothe “Activation / Deactivation” section).

When the conditions shown in the“Setting The Desired Speed” sectionoccur.

Limited OperationWarning

If the dedicated message is shown onthe display, a condition limiting theAdaptive Cruise Control operation mayhave occurred.This could be due to an obstruction ofthe vehicle’s sensor or camera. It couldalso be due to a fault in the system.If an obstruction is detected, clean thearea of the windshield opposite theinterior rear view mirror, where thecamera is located, as well as the areaof the front bumper where the sensor islocated. Then check that the messagehas disappeared.When the conditions limiting the systemfunctions end, normal operation willresume.Should the fault persist, contact anauthorized dealer.

Precautions While DrivingThe system may not work correctly insome driving conditions (see below).The driver must control the vehicle atall times.

Vehicle Not AlignedThe system may not detect a vehicletraveling in the same lane, in the samedirection, but is not aligned. It also maynot detect a vehicle which is cutting infrom a side lane. Sufficient distancefrom the vehicles ahead may not beguaranteed in these cases.

157

The non-aligned vehicle can weave inand out of the driving lane causingthe vehicle to brake or accelerateunexpectedly.

Steering And CurvesDriving on curves with the system setcould limit speed and acceleration toguarantee vehicle stability, even if novehicles are detected ahead.When leaving the curve, the systemresets the previously set speed.

Note:

In cases of narrow curves, theperformance of the system could belimited. In this case, it is advisable todeactivate the system.

The system only limits the speedDURING a bend and not BEFORE it.

Using The System On SlopesWhen driving on roads with a variableincline, the system may not detect thepresence of a vehicle in the lane.System performance could be limitedaccording to speed, load, trafficconditions and steep slopes.

Lane ChangeThe system may not detect thepresence of a vehicle until it is fully inyour lane.

In this case, sufficient distance from thevehicle which is changing lanes may notbe guaranteed. It is advisable to pay theutmost attention at all times and bealways ready to apply the brakes ifneeded.

Small VehiclesSome narrow vehicles (e.g. bicyclesand motorcycles) traveling near theouter edges of the lane or which enterthe lane from curb side are notdetected until they are fully in the lane.

Sufficient distance from the vehiclesahead may not be guaranteed in thesecases.

07146S0011EM

Steering And Curves07146S0012EM

Lane Change

07146S0013EM

Small Vehicles

158

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Stationary Objects And VehiclesThe system cannot detect the presenceof stationary vehicles or objects. Forexample, the system will not operate ifthe vehicle ahead leaves the lane and avehicle ahead of that one is stationary inthat lane. Pay the utmost attention at alltimes and be always ready to apply thebrakes if needed.

Objects And Vehicles Moving InOpposite Or Crosswise DirectionThe system cannot detect the presenceof objects or vehicles traveling inopposite or crosswise directions andconsequently will not activate.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operateon radio frequency that comply withPart 15 of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

PARK SENSORSSYSTEMVehicles With RearSensors Only

The parking sensors, located in the rearbumper, detect obstacles while thevehicle is in REVERSE. When anobstacle is detected, an acoustic alertwill sound and visual indications will bedisplayed on the instrument cluster.

07146S0014EM

Objects And Vehicles Moving InOpposite Or Crosswise Direction

07176S0001EM


159

Engagement/DisengagementTo turn the system off, push the ParkSensors System button located to theleft of the headlight switch. Theindicator light within the button willilluminate when the system is turnedoff. Pushing the button a second timewill turn the system back on, and theindicator light will turn off.

The indicator light within the ParkSensors System switch will also be onin case of system failure. If the switch ispushed with a system failure, theindicator light will flash forapproximately five seconds. The lightwill then stay on constantly.Note: When the ignition is cycled toON, the Park Sensors System keepsthe last state when the engine wasstopped (activated or deactivated) in itsmemory.

System Activation/DeactivationThe system, when engaged, isautomatically activated by engaging theREVERSE gear. It is deactivated byengaging another gear.

Acoustic SignalWhen REVERSE is engaged and thereis an obstacle behind the vehicle, anacoustic signal with variable frequencywill sound.

The acoustic signal increases infrequency as the distance between thevehicle and the obstacle decreases.

The acoustic signal becomescontinuous when the distance betweenthe vehicle and the obstacle is less than11 inches (30 cm), and stops if thedistance increases.

The acoustic signal is constant if thedistance between the vehicle and theobstacle is unchanged.Note: If several obstacles are detectedby the sensors, only the nearest one isconsidered.

Indication On DisplayThe driver can select the type ofwarning they would like to bedisplayed through the Information andEntertainment System. To access thefunction on the main menu, select in thefollowing order:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Driver Assistance.”

3. “ParkSense.”

4. “Mode.”

5. “Sound-Display.”

Visual IndicationsThe system indicates the presence ofan obstacle by displaying a single redarc in the detected area, in relation tothe distance of the object and theposition of the vehicle.If the obstacle is detected in the rearcentral area, a single red arc will bedisplayed as the obstacle approaches,first constant, then flashing, in additionto an acoustic signal.If the obstacle is detected in the rear leftand/or right area, a single red flashingarc will be shown in the correspondingarea on the display and the system willemit an acoustic signal, either atfrequent intervals or constantly.In general, the vehicle is closer to theobstacle when a single red flashing arcis shown on the display and theacoustic signal becomes continuous.If several obstacles are detectedsimultaneously in the rear area, thedisplay will show all of them, regardlessof the area in which they were detected.It is not possible to exit from the displayscreen while the vehicle is in REVERSE.

07176S0052EM

Park Sensors System On/Off Switch

160

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Fault IndicationParking sensor faults, if any, will beindicated when REVERSE is engagedby a message on the instrument clusterdisplay. Refer to "Warning Lights AndMessages" in "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" for furtherinformation.

Messages On The DisplayIn case of system failure, a dedicatedmessage appears on the instrumentcluster for about five seconds.

Cleaning The Front Sensors: If thedisplay shows a message requiring thesensors to be cleaned, make sure thatthe outer surface and the underside ofthe rear bumper is free of debris (e.g.snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once these areasare clear, cycle the ignition to the STOPposition. Then, return it to ON position.If the message is still displayed, contactan authorized dealer.

Audio System Not Available: If thedisplay shows a message that theaudio system is not available, it meansthat the acoustic signal will be emittedby the instrument panel, and notthrough the vehicles speakers.

Note: Some conditions may influencethe performance of the Park SensorsSystem:

Reduced sensor sensitivity couldbe due to the presence of ice, snow,mud, or thick paint on the surface ofthe sensor.

The sensors may detect a falseobstacle (echo interference) due tomechanical interference, for examplewhen washing the vehicle or inextreme weather.

The signals sent by the sensors canbe altered by the presence ofultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumaticbrake systems of trucks or pneumaticdrills) near the vehicle.

System performance can beinfluenced by the position of thesensors. For example, due to a changein the ride setting (caused by wear tothe shock absorbers or suspension),by changing tires, overloading thevehicle or operations that require thevehicle to be lowered.

Be sure not to place bumperstickers or other adhesives over thesensors as this will affect systemperformance.

Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using the Parking Sensorsystem. Always check carefully behindyour vehicle, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles,obstructions, or blind spots before backingup. You are responsible for the safety ofyour surroundings and must continue topay attention while backing up. Failure todo so can result in serious injury or death.

Caution!

The Parking Sensor system is only aparking aid and it is unable to recognizeevery obstacle, including small obstacles.Parking curbs might be temporarilydetected or not detected at all. Obstacleslocated above or below the sensors willnot be detected when they are in closeproximity

The vehicle must be driven slowly whenusing the Parking Sensor system in orderto be able to stop in time when an obstacleis detected. It is recommended that thedriver looks over his/her shoulder whenusing the Parking Sensor system.

161

Vehicles With Front AndRear Sensors

The parking sensors, located in thefront and rear bumpers, detect thepresence of any obstacles and warnthe driver through an acoustic signaland visual indications will be displayedon the instrument cluster.

Engagement/DisengagementTo turn the system off, push the ParkSensors System switch located to theleft of the headlight switch. Theindicator light within the switch willilluminate when the system is turnedoff. Pushing the switch a second timewill turn the system back on, and theindicator light will turn off.The indicator light within the ParkSensors System switch will also be onin case of system failure. If the switchis pushed with a system failure,the indicator light will flash forapproximately five seconds. The lightwill then stay on constantly.Note: When the ignition is cycled toON the Park Sensors system keeps thelast state when the engine was stopped(activated or deactivated) in its memory.

System Activation/DeactivationWhen the REVERSE gear is engagedand the system is on, the front and rearsensors are activated. If the vehiclemoves from REVERSE to a forwardgear, the rear sensors are deactivated,while the front sensors remain activeuntil the speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) isexceeded.Note: In certain operating conditions,the system could start detecting anobstacle only after the vehicle hasmoved slightly (a few inches).

Acoustic SignalIn the presence of an obstacle at thefront or the rear of the vehicle, anacoustic signal with variable frequencywill sound:

The acoustic signal increases infrequency as the distance between thevehicle and the obstacle decreases.

The acoustic signal becomescontinuous when the distance betweenthe vehicle and the obstacle is less than11 inches (30 cm), and stops if thedistance increases.

The acoustic signal is constant if thedistance between the vehicle and theobstacle is unchanged.Note: If the sensors detect severalfront and rear obstacles, the closestobstacle is considered. An intermittentsignal will sound if the obstacles are atthe same distance (front and rear).When the system emits an acousticsignal, the volume of the Informationand Entertainment System, if activated,is automatically lowered.

Indication On DisplayThe driver can select the type ofwarning they would like to bedisplayed through the Information andEntertainment System. To accessthe function on the main menu, select inthe following order:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Driver Assistance.”

07176S0003EM

Front Sensor Location

07176S0001EM


162

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

3. “ParkSense.”

4. “Mode.”

5. “Sound-Display.”

Visual IndicationsThe system indicates the presence ofan obstacle by displaying a single redarc in the detected areas, in relation tothe distance of the object and theposition of the vehicle.If the obstacle is detected in the front orrear central area, a single red arc will bedisplayed as the obstacle approaches,first constant, then flashing, in additionto an acoustic signal.If the obstacle is detected in the front orrear left and/or right area, a single redflashing arc will be shown in thecorresponding area on the display andthe system will emit an acoustic signal,either at frequent intervals or constantly.If several obstacles are detectedsimultaneously in the front and reararea, the display will show all of them,regardless of the area in which theywere detected.In general, the vehicle is closer to theobstacle when a single or severalflashing arcs are shown on the displayand the acoustic signal becomescontinuous.It is not possible to exit from the displayscreen while the vehicle is in REVERSE.

Fault IndicationParking sensor faults, if any, will beindicated by a message on the displayon the instrument cluster. Refer to"Warning Lights And Messages" in"Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel" for further information.

Messages On The DisplayIn case of system failure, a dedicatedmessage appears on the instrumentcluster for about five seconds.

Cleaning The Front Or RearSensors: If the display shows amessage requiring the sensors to becleaned, make sure that the outersurface and the underside of the frontand rear bumpers are free of debris(e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once theseareas are clear, place the ignition inSTOP mode. Then, return it to ONmode. If the message is still displayed,contact an authorized dealer.

Audio System Not Available: If thedisplay shows a message that theaudio system is not available, it meansthat the acoustic signal will be emittedby the instrument panel, and notthrough the vehicles speakers.

Note: Some conditions may influencethe performance of the Park SensorsSystem:

Reduced sensor sensitivity couldbe due to the presence of ice, snow,mud, or thick paint on the surface ofthe sensor.

The sensors may detect a falseobstacle (echo interference) due tomechanical interference, for examplewhen washing the vehicle or inextreme weather.

The signals sent by the sensors canbe altered by the presence ofultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumaticbrake systems of trucks or pneumaticdrills) near the vehicle.

System performance can beinfluenced by the position of thesensors. For example, due to a changein the ride setting (caused by wear tothe shock absorbers or suspension),by changing tires, overloading thevehicle or operations that require thevehicle to be lowered.

Be sure not to place bumperstickers or other adhesives over thesensors as this will affect systemperformance.

163

Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using the Parking Sensorsystem. Always check carefully behindyour vehicle, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles,obstructions, or blind spots before backingup. You are responsible for the safety ofyour surroundings and must continue topay attention while backing up. Failure todo so can result in serious injury or death.

Caution!

The Parking Sensor system is only aparking aid and it is unable to recognizeevery obstacle, including small obstacles.Parking curbs might be temporarilydetected or not detected at all. Obstacleslocated above or below the sensors willnot be detected when they are in closeproximity

The vehicle must be driven slowly whenusing the Parking Sensor system in orderto be able to stop in time when an obstacleis detected. It is recommended that thedriver looks over his/her shoulder whenusing the Parking Sensor system.

LANE DEPARTUREWARNING (LDW)SYSTEMDescription

The Lane Departure Warning systemuses a forward looking camera locatedon the windshield to detect lanemarkings and measure vehicle positionwithin the lane boundaries.When one or both lane limits aredetected and the vehicle passes overone without an activated turn signal,the system emits a visual as well as anacoustic signal.If the vehicle continues to go beyondthe line of the lane without anyintervention from the driver, thesurpassed line will light up on thedisplay (left or right) to urge the driver tobring the vehicle back into the limits ofthe lane.

Caution!

Do not tamper with nor operate on thecamera. Do not close the openings in theaesthetic cover located under the interiorrear view mirror. In the event of a failure ofthe camera, contact your authorized dealer.

The camera may have limited or absentoperation due to weather conditions suchas: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,formation of ice layers on the windshield.

Camera operation may also becompromised by the presence of dust,condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield,by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that aredriving not aligned with yours, vehicledriving in a transverse or opposite way onthe same lane, bend with a small radius ofcurvature), by road surface conditions andby driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving).Make sure the windshield is always clean.Use specific detergents and clean clothsto avoid scratching the windshield. Thecamera operation may also be limited orabsent in some driving, traffic and roadsurface conditions.

If the windshield must be replaced dueto scratches, chipping or breakage,contact exclusively your authorized dealer.Do not replace the windshield on your own.It is advisable to replace the windshield if itis damaged in the area of the camera.

164

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

System Activation/Deactivation

The system is activated/deactivated bypushing the button located on the endof the multifunction lever.

Note: When the engine is started, thesystem maintains the operating modethat was selected when it was turnedOFF.

Activation ConditionsOnce turned on, the system becomesactive only if the following conditionsare met:

The vehicle speed is above 37 mph(60 km/h).

The lane limit lines are visible at leaston one side.

There are suitable visibility conditions.

The road is straight or with wideradius bends.

A suitable distance is kept from thevehicle in front.

The turn signal is not active.

Symbols And MessagesOn The Display

The Lane Departure Warning systemadvises the driver when the vehicleleaves the driving lane by showingsymbols and messages on theinstrument cluster display.

When the system is active and the lanelimits have not been detected, thedisplay shows a grey vehicle icon withtwo grey lines.

Exiting A Lane With Detection Of ASingle LimitWhen the system is active and only, forexample, the left lane limit has beendetected, the detected lane illuminatesin white on the display; the system isready to provide visual warnings on thedisplay in the event of unintentionalexiting of the lane (turn signal notactivated) to the left.

07226S0001EM

Lane Departure Warning SystemActivation/Deactivation Button

07226S0002EM

Vehicle Changing Lanes

07226S0007EM

Lane Limits Not Detected

07226S0003EM

Left Lane Limit Detected

165

When the system detects that thevehicle has approached the lane lineand is about to pass it, the left line onthe display illuminates in yellow.

The system operates in the same way,but mirrored, in the event of exiting theright lane when only the right lane limithas been detected.

Exiting A Lane With Detection OfBoth LimitsWhen the system is active, both lanelines on the display illuminate in white toindicate the successful detection ofboth limits.

When lane limits are detected, thesystem is ready to provide indications incase the driver unintentionally leaves thelane (turn signal not activated).As the Lane Departure Warning systemdetects the lane limits while the vehicle isin motion, it will adjust the displayaccordingly (from white to yellow andvice versa, and increase their thickness).

If a line is crossed, the driver is alertedby an audible signal as well as thevisual indication in the instrumentcluster. The signal is emitted throughthe speakers on the side of the lanelimit which is being crossed (eg. if thevehicle is exceeding the left line of thelane, the audible signal will come fromthe speakers on the left of the vehicle).

Changing The System SettingsThe system's sensitivity can be setthrough the Information andEntertainment System. Sensitivity“High” or “Low” can be selected.To access the function, from the mainmenu select the following in order:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Safety.”

3. “Lane Departure Warning.”

4. “Sensitivity.”

Limited Operation WarningIf a message appears on the display, acondition limiting the Lane DepartureWarning system operation may haveoccurred. This could be an obstructionof the camera view, or a fault in thesystem.

07226S0004EM

Left Lane Limit Approached

07226S0005EM

Both Lane Limits Detected

07226S0006EM

Right Lane Limit Approached

166

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

If an obstruction is detected, clean thearea of the windshield by the interiorrear view mirror.Although the vehicle can still be drivenin normal conditions, the system maynot function properly.When the conditions limiting the systemare corrected, it will go back to normaloperation. Should a fault persist,contact an authorized dealer.

System Failure WarningIf the system turns off and appearson the display, it means that there is asystem fault.In this case, it is still possible to drivethe vehicle, but you are advised tocontact an authorized dealer as soonas possible.

REAR BACK-UPCAMERA / DYNAMICGRIDLINESDescription

The Rear Back-Up Camera is locatedjust under the vehicle’s trunk lid, abovethe rear license plate.

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, theInformation and Entertainment Systemdisplay will show the area behind thevehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-upCamera, along with a warningmessage.

Rear Back-Up Camera FeaturesTo activate the Rear Back-Up Camerafeatures, select “Settings” from theMain Menu of the Information andEntertainment System. Under “DriverAssistance”, Rear Back-Up Camerafeatures can be selected:

View

Camera Delay

Camera GuidelinesSelecting “View” will activate thecamera view on the display.Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow thecamera view to remain on the displayshortly after the vehicle is no longer inREVERSE, followed by the previouslyactive screen.Selecting “Camera Guidelines” willactivate the display of the dynamicguidelines that indicate the route of thevehicle.

07186S0001EM

Rear Back-Up Camera Location

07186S0002EM

Rear Back-Up Camera Display

167

Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using the Rear Back UpCamera. Always check carefully behindyour vehicle, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles,obstructions, or blind spots before backingup. You are responsible for the safety ofyour surroundings and must continue topay attention while backing up. Failure todo so can result in serious injury or death.

Caution!

To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back UpCamera should only be used as a parkingaid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable toview every obstacle or object in your drivepath.

To avoid vehicle damage, the vehiclemust be driven slowly when using the RearBack Up Camera to be able to stop in timewhen an obstacle is seen. It isrecommended that the driver lookfrequently over his/her shoulder when usingthe Rear Back Up Camera.

Symbols And MessagesOn The Display

Indications On The DisplayThrough the Information andEntertainment System settings, byactivating the "Camera Guidelines"feature, guidelines can be seen on therear camera display. If activated, theguidelines are positioned on the imageto highlight the width of the vehicle andthe expected reverse path based on thesteering wheel position.A superimposed central line indicatesthe center of the vehicle to assist in rearparking maneuvers. The various coloredareas indicate the distance from therear of the vehicle.The table below shows the approximatedistances for each area:

Area Distance from therear of the vehicle

Red 0–11.8 inches(0–30 cm)

Yellow 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet(30 cm–1 m)

Green 3.3 feet or more(1 m or more)

Messages On The DisplayIf the trunk lid is lifted, the camera willnot detect any obstacle behind thevehicle. The display will show adedicated warning message.Make sure the trunk lid is closed bypushing next to the lock until it clicks.

Important Notes

Ice, snow or mud on the surface ofthe camera may reduce its sensitivity. Itis important to keep the camera surfaceclean, and free from debris.

When parking, be aware of obstaclesthat may be above or under the camerarange.

168

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

REFUELING THEVEHICLERefueling The Vehicle

Before refueling, make sure that the fueltype is correct.Also, stop the engine before refueling.Note: An inefficient catalytic converterleads to harmful exhaust emissions,thus contributing to air pollution.

Caution!

Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank,even in small amounts in an emergency, asthis would damage the catalytic converterbeyond repair.

Refueling Capacity

To ensure that you fill the tankcompletely, top off twice after the firstclick of the fuel nozzle.Further top-off could cause faults in thefuel feeding system.

Refueling ProcedureThe fuel filler door is unlocked when thecentral door locking system isunlocked. It is automatically lockedwhen the central locking system isapplied.

Opening The Fuel Filler DoorTo refuel proceed as follows:

1. Open fuel filler door by pressing onthe point shown by the arrow.

2. Remove the fuel filler cap.

3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into thefiller pipe.

4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” orshuts off, before removing the nozzle,wait for at least 10 seconds in order forthe fuel to flow inside the tank.

5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tightenthe gas cap about ¼ turn until you hearone click. This is an indication that capis properly tightened.The label indicates the fuel type(UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline).

Emergency Fuel Door OpeningIn the event of an emergency the fuelfiller door can be opened by operatingfrom inside the trunk.Proceed as follows:

1. Open the trunk and locate theemergency fuel filler release cap on theinside lining.

2. Open the cap, and pull the cordinside to unlock the fuel filler door.

3. Open the fuel filler door by pressingon it (see the previous instructions).

07206S0001EM

Fuel Door

07206S0002EM

Fuel Door Label

169

Warning!

Never have any smoking materials lit inor near the vehicle when the fuel door isopen or the tank is being filled.

Never add fuel when the engine isrunning. This is in violation of most stateand federal fire regulations and may causethe MIL to turn on.

A fire may result if gasoline is pumpedinto a portable container that is inside of avehicle. You could be burned. Always placegas containers on the ground while filling.

Note: If the filler compartment iswashed with a pressure washer, keep itat a distance of at least 8 inches(20 cm).

VEHICLE LOADINGCertification Label

As required by National Highway TrafficSafety Administration regulations, yourvehicle has a certification label affixed tothe driver's side door or pillar.This label contains the month and yearof manufacture, Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) front and rear, andVehicle Identification Number (VIN).A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number isincluded on this label and indicates theMonth, Day and Hour of manufacture.The bar code that appears on thebottom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissibleweight of your vehicle including driver,passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.The label also specifies maximumcapacities of front and rear axlesystems (GAWR). Total load must belimited so GVWR and front and rearGAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined asthe allowable load weight a truck cancarry, including the weight of the driver,all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissibleload on the front and rear axles. Theload must be distributed in the cargoarea so that the GAWR of each axle isnot exceeded.Each axle GAWR is determined by thecomponents in the system with thelowest load carrying capacity (axle,springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axlesor suspension components sometimesspecified by purchasers for increaseddurability does not necessarily increasethe vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle CertificationLabel represents the actual tire size onyour vehicle. Replacement tires must beequal to the load capacity of this tiresize.

170

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriatefor the tire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure foryour vehicle for all loading conditions upto full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is definedas the total weight of the vehicle with allfluids, including vehicle fuel, at fullcapacity conditions, and with nooccupants or cargo loaded into thevehicle. The front and rear curb weightvalues are determined by weighing yourvehicle on a commercial scale beforeany occupants or cargo are added.

Loading

The actual total weight and the weightof the front and rear of your vehicle atthe ground can best be determined byweighing it when it is loaded and readyfor operation.The entire vehicle should first beweighed on a commercial scale toinsure that the GVWR has not beenexceeded. The weight on the front and

rear of the vehicle should then bedetermined separately to be sure thatthe load is properly distributed over thefront and rear axle. Weighing the vehiclemay show that the GAWR of either thefront or rear axles has been exceededbut the total load is within the specifiedGVWR. If so, weight must be shiftedfrom front to rear or rear to front asappropriate until the specified weightlimitations are met. Store the heavieritems down low and be sure that theweight is distributed equally. Stow allloose items securely before driving.Improper weight distributions can havean adverse effect on the way yourvehicle steers and handles and the waythe brakes operate.

Caution!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe GVWR or the maximum front and rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could cause you tolose control. Also overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWINGTrailer towing is not recommended forthis vehicle.

171

SUGGESTIONS FORDRIVINGSaving FuelBelow are some suggestions whichmay help you save fuel and lower theamount of harmful emissions releasedinto the atmosphere.

Vehicle MaintenanceChecks and operations should becarried out in accordance with theMaintenance Plan. Refer to "ScheduledServicing" in "Servicing AndMaintenance" for further information.

TiresCheck the tire pressures at least onceevery four weeks: if the pressure is toolow, consumption levels increase asresistance to rolling is higher.

Unnecessary LoadsDo not travel with an overloaded trunk.The weight of the vehicle and itsarrangement greatly affect fuelconsumption and stability.

Electric DevicesUse electrical systems only for theamount of time needed. The rearwindow defroster, additional headlights,windshield wipers and heater blowerfan require a considerable amount ofenergy; increasing the current uptakeincreases fuel consumption (by up to+25% when city driving).

Climate Control SystemUsing the climate control system willincrease consumption: use standardventilation when the temperatureoutside permits.

Devices for Aerodynamic ControlThe use of non-certified devices foraerodynamic control may adverselyaffect air drag and consumption levels.

Driving Style

StartingDo not warm up the engine at low orhigh revs when the vehicle is stationary;this causes the engine to warm upmore slowly, thereby increasing fuelconsumption and emissions. It istherefore advisable to drive offimmediately, slowly, avoiding highspeeds: by doing this the engine willwarm up more quickly.

Unnecessary ActionsAvoid revving up when starting at trafficlights or before stopping the engine.This action is unnecessary and causesincreased fuel consumption andpollution.

Gear SelectionUse a high gear when traffic and roadconditions allow it. Using a low gear forfaster acceleration will increase fuelconsumption. Improper use of a highgear increases consumption, emissionsand engine wear.

Max. SpeedFuel consumption considerablyincreases as speed increases. Maintaina constant speed, avoidingunnecessary braking and acceleration,which cost in terms of both fuelconsumption and emissions.

AccelerationAccelerating violently severely affectsconsumption and emissions:acceleration should be gradual andshould not exceed the maximumtorque.

Conditions Of Use

Cold StartingShort trips and frequent cold starts willnot allow the engine to reach optimumoperating temperature. This results in asignificant increase in consumptionlevels (from +15 to +30% in city driving)and emissions.

Traffic And Road ConditionsHigh fuel consumption is caused byheavy traffic, for instance whentravelling in traffic with frequent use oflow gears or in cities with many trafficlights. Winding mountain roads andrough road surfaces also adverselyaffect consumption.

Stops In TrafficDuring prolonged stops (e.g. railwaycrossings) turn off the engine.

172

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Transporting Passengers

Warning!

It is extremely dangerous to leavechildren in a parked vehicle when thetemperature outside is very high. The heatinside the passenger compartment mayhave serious, or even fatal, consequences.

Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle.In the event of an accident, anyone insidethe trunk would be at greater risk of seriousor even fatal injury.

Ensure that all the occupants of thevehicle wear their seat belts correctly andthat any children are positioned correctlyon the dedicated child restraint systems.

Transporting AnimalsThe intervention of the airbags may bedangerous for an animal on the frontseat. It is therefore advised to arrangeanimals on the rear seat insidededicated cages restrained by thevehicle’s seat belts.Keep in mind that, in the event of asudden braking or an accident, aninadequately restrained animal may beprojected within the passengercompartment, risking injury to theanimal itself and the other occupants ofthe vehicle.

Exhaust Gas

Exhaust emissions are very dangerous,and may be lethal. They contain carbonmonoxide, a colorless, odorless gaswhich can cause fainting and poisoningif inhaled.To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide,take the following measures:

Do not keep the engine running inclosed spaces.

If, for some reason (e.g. transportingbulky loads), it is necessary to drivewith the trunk open, close all thewindows and run the climate control fanat maximum speed. DO NOT activateair recirculation mode.

Should it be necessary to stay in thestationary vehicle with engine running,adjust the ventilation/heating systemand operate the fan in such a way thatoutside air will enter the passengercompartment. Activate the maximumfan speed.Maintenance of the exhaust systemprovides the best protection againstleaks of carbon monoxide into thepassenger compartment.Should an unusual noise from theexhaust system or the presence ofexhaust gas in the passengercompartment be identified, or if the

underbody or rear section of the vehicleis damaged, have the entire exhaustsystem and bodywork areas checkedto identify any components which arebroken, damaged, worn or have movedfrom their correct fitting position. If anyof these things occur, contact yourauthorized dealer.Open welding or loose connectionsmay permit exhaust gas to enter thepassenger compartment.Check the exhaust system each timethe vehicle is raised for lubrication or oilchange operations. Replace thecomponents if necessary, contact yourauthorized dealer.

173

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb?

At times, a problem such as these mayinterfere with your driving experience.

The section on emergencies can helpyou to deal with critical situationsindependently.

In an emergency, we recommend thatyou call the phone number found in theWarranty Book.

You may also consider contacting yournearest authorized dealer.

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . .175BULB REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . .175FUSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180TIRE REPAIR KIT — IF EQUIPPED . .185JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . .188REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . .191ENGINE OVERHEATING . . . . . . .191TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . .192TOW EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193ENHANCED ACCIDENTRESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . . . .195EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .195

174

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTSThe Hazard Warning flasher switch islocated in the switch bank below theradio screen.

Push the switch onceto turn the hazardwarning flasher on.When the switch isactivated, alldirectional turn signals

will flash on and off to warn oncomingtraffic of an emergency. Push the switcha second time to turn the hazardwarning flashers off.This is an emergency warning systemand it should not be used when thevehicle is in motion. Use it when yourvehicle is disabled and is creating asafety hazard for other motorists.When you must leave the vehicle toseek assistance, the hazard warningflashers will continue to operate eventhough the ignition is cycled to OFF.

Note: With extended use the hazardwarning flashers may discharge yourbattery.

Caution!

Prolonged use of the hazard warningflashers may discharge the vehicle’sbattery.

BULBREPLACEMENTGeneral Instructions

Before replacing a bulb, check thecontacts for oxidation.

Replace blown bulbs with others ofthe same type and power.

After replacing a headlight bulb,always check its alignment.

When a light is not working, checkthat the corresponding fuse is intactbefore changing the bulb. For thelocation of fuses, refer to “Fuses” in thischapter.Note: In some particular climateconditions, such as low temperature,humidity, or after washing the car, a thincondensation layer may form on theinternal surfaces of the front and rearheadlights. This condensation willdisappear after switching on theheadlights.

08016S0001EM

Hazard Warning Switch

175

Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder,press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector tothe side and pull it out.

Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact anauthorized dealer.

176

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power

Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W

Rear Fog lights H11 55 W

Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W

Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W

Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W

Glove compartment light W5W 4 W

Deck lid light W5W 5 W

Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W

177

Replacing Exterior BulbsNote: Only replace the bulb when theengine is off. Also ensure that theengine is cold, to prevent the risk ofburns.Direction IndicatorsTo change the bulb of these lights,proceed as follows:1. Operating inside the enginecompartment, remove the protectivecover.

2. Remove protective cover.

3. Turn the bulb/connector assemblycounterclockwise, and then slide it offthe headlight body.

4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off thebulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb, making sure it iscorrectly inserted in the bulb holder.

6. Insert the bulb/connector assemblyin the housing on the headlight bodyand turn it clockwise, making sure thatit is locked correctly.

7. Install the protective cover.

Front Light Cluster with Main BeamXenon Gas Discharge HeadlightsTo replace the bulbs of the main beamheadlights, contact your authorizeddealer.

Caution!

Do not touch the new bulb with yourfingers. Oil contamination will severelyshorten bulb life. If the bulb comes incontact with any oily surface, clean thebulb with rubbing alcohol.

Replacing Interior Bulbs

Courtesy Mirror LightTo replace the bulbs, proceed asfollows:

1. Lift the mirror cover and remove thelens, using a suitable tool.

08026S0023EM

Protective Cover Location

08026S0006EM

Protective Cover

08026S0007EM

Bulb/Connector

08026S0008EM

Sun Visor

1 — Mirror Cover2 — Lens

178

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

2. Change the bulb, releasing it fromthe side contacts, then insert the newbulb, making sure that it is correctlyfastened between the contacts.

3. Install the lens, inserting it firstly onone side and then pressing on the otherside until it clicks into place.

Glove Compartment LightTo replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Remove the courtesy light assembly,using a suitable tool.

3. Open protective cover up andremove the bulb pulling out of theconnector.

4. Install bulb, making sure that it iscorrectly inserted fully.

5. Close the protective cover on thelens.

6. Install courtesy light, inserting it firston one side and then pressing on theother side until it clicks into place.

Luggage Compartment CourtesyLightsTo replace the bulbs, proceed asfollows:

1. Open the trunk, and remove thetrunk lamp assembly using a suitabletool.



08026S0009EM

Courtesy Lamp Indent

08026S0011EM

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction08026S0010EM

Ceiling Light Indent

08026S0011EM

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

179


5. Install trunk lamp in the correctposition, inserting it firstly on one side,and then pressing on the other sideuntil it clicks into place.

Puddle Lights On Door PanelTo replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Open the door and remove thepuddle light assembly, using a suitabletool.




5. Install puddle light in the correctposition, inserting it firstly on one sideand then pressing on the other sideuntil it clicks into place.

FUSESGeneral Information

The fuses protect electrical systemsagainst excessive current.When a device does not work, youmust check the electrical circuit insideof the fuse for a break/melt.Also, please be aware that using poweroutlets for extended periods of timewith the engine off may result in vehiclebattery discharge.

08026S0012EM

Puddle Light Indent

08026S0011EM

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

2

3

1

0726067916

Blade Fuses

1 — Electrical Circuit2 — Blade Fuse With Good ElectricalCircuit3 — Blade Fuse With Bad ElectricalCircuit

180

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Fuse Extracting PliersTo replace a fuse, use the pliers hookedto the fuse box.

Grab the pliers from the upper tabs,press them, and extract the plierspulling upwards.The pliers have two different ends, bothof which are specifically designed toremove the different types of fusespresent in the vehicle:

After use, return the pliers to theirproper position by following the belowprocedures:

Grasp the pliers from the upper tabsand insert them into their housing.

Push downward on the pliers intotheir housing until they click into place.

Warning!

When replacing a blown fuse, alwaysuse an appropriate replacement fuse withthe same amp rating as the original fuse.Never replace a fuse with another fuse ofhigher amp rating. Never replace a blownfuse with metal wires or any other material.Failure to use proper fuses may result inserious personal injury, fire and/or propertydamage.

Before replacing a fuse, make sure thatthe ignition is off and that all the otherservices are switched off and/or disengaged.

If the replaced fuse blows again, contactan authorized dealer.

If a general protection fuse for safetysystems (air bag system, braking system),power unit systems (engine system,transmission system) or steering systemblows, contact an authorized dealer.

Fuse LocationThe fuses, which can be replaced bythe user, are grouped in two boxesbelow the passenger side foot boardand inside the trunk.

08036S0002EM

J-CASE Fuse

1 — Electrical Circuit2 — Case Fuse With Good ElectricalCircuit3 — Case Fuse With Bad ElectricalCircuit

08036S0053EM

Fuse Box

08036S0005EM

Fuse Extracting Pliers

1 — MINI fuse2 — J-CASE fuse

181

Control Unit UnderPassenger SideFootboard

To access the fuses, proceed asfollows:

1. Lift the upper end of the footboardon the passenger side, pulling torelease the two buttons.

Release Buttons On Footboard

1 — Footboard

2. Unscrewing the two hooks, removethe panel pulling downward.

Release Hooks On Footboard

2 — Panel

The fuses are freely accessible on thecontrol unit.After replacing the fuse, make sure thatpanel and footboard are correctlylocked.

Luggage CompartmentFuse Box

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the luggage compartment cover.

2. Remove the control unit cover.

The fuses are freely accessible on thecontrol unit.The number identifying the electricalcomponent corresponding to each fuseis shown on the cover.After replacing a fuse, make sure thatyou have closed cover correctly.

08036S0010EM

08036S0011EM

08036S0014EM

Control Unit

182

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE

Front power window (driver side) F33 25

Front power window (passenger side) F34 25

Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Controlsystem, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port F36 15

Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped),Doors unlock, Central lock F38 20

Windshield washer pump F43 20

Rear left power window F47 25

Rear right power window F48 25

Heater rear window coil F94 15

08036S0013EM

Passenger Side Control Unit

183

Luggage Compartment Fuse Box

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE

Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40

Hi-Fi system F8 30

KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5

I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10

KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20

08036S0015EM

Luggage Compartment Control Unit

184

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

TIRE REPAIR KIT —IF EQUIPPEDDescription

If a tire is punctured, you can make afirst emergency repair using the TireRepair Kit located in the rear storagearea under the load floor.Note: Vehicles equipped with Run FlatTires will not be equipped with a TireRepair Kit.

The Tire Repair Kit includes:

Sealant cartridge containing thesealing fluid.

Filler tube.

Adhesive label with the writing "Max.50 mph (80 km/h)”, to be attached in aposition easily visible to the driver (eg.on the dashboard) after repairing thetire.

Air compressor, complete withpressure gauge and connectors.

An instruction pamphlet for referencein prompt and correct use of the TireRepair Kit, which must be then given tothe personnel dealing with thesealant-treated tire.

A pair of protective gloves.

Some adaptors, for inflating differentelements.

Note: The sealing fluid is effective withexternal temperatures of between -40°F(-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). The sealingfluid has an expiration date.

To use the Tire Repair Kit, proceed asfollows:

1. Stop the vehicle in a position whereyou can repair the tire safely. Youshould be as far as possible from theside of the road, and in a position thatis not dangerous for oncoming traffic.Engage the hazard warning flashers,remove the safety triangle from theluggage compartment, and place it at asuitable distance from the vehicle tomake other drivers aware of yourpresence.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on thewheel with the deflated tire) is in aposition that is near to the ground.This will allow the tire repair kit hoses toreach the valve stem and keep the tirerepair kit flat on the ground.

3. Shift the gear selector to PARK (P).

4. Apply the electric park brake andturn the engine OFF.

Inflation Procedure

Warning!

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the sideof the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull farenough off the road to avoid the danger ofbeing hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

08066S0001EM

Tire Repair Kit Location08066S0002EM

Tire Repair Kit Components

1— Sealant Cartridge2— Filler Tube3— Adhesive Label4— Air Compressor

185

Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive thevehicle under the following circumstances:

If the puncture in the tire tread isapproximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

If the tire has any sidewall damage.

If the tire has any damage from drivingwith extremely low tire pressure.

If the tire has any damage from drivingon a flat tire.

If the wheel has any damage.

If you are unsure of the condition of thetire or the wheel.

Keep Tire Service Kit away from openflames or heat sources.

A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forwardin a collision or hard stop could endangerthe occupants of the vehicle. Always stowthe Tire Service Kit in the place provided.Failure to follow these warnings can resultin injuries that are serious or fatal to you,your passengers, and others around you.

Take care not to allow the contents ofTire Service Kit to come in contact withhair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kitsealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, orabsorbed through the skin. It causes skin,eye, and respiratory irritation. Flushimmediately with plenty of water if there isany contact with eyes or skin. Changeclothing as soon as possible, if there is anycontact with clothing.

Tire Service Kit Sealant solution containslatex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,consult a physician immediately. Keep TireService Kit out of reach of children. Ifswallowed, rinse mouth immediately withplenty of water and drink plenty of water.Do not induce vomiting! Consult aphysician immediately.

To use your Tire Repair Kit, proceed asfollows:

1. Engage the electric parking brake.

2. Insert the sealant cartridgecontaining the sealing liquid in theproper compressor holder, pushingdown hard. Unscrew the tire valve cap,take out the filler tube and tighten thering nut on the tire valve.

3. Make sure the power switch of thecompressor is in the off position (O).

4. Insert the plug into the power outletin the center console, then start theengine.

5. Start the compressor by placing thepower switch in the on position (I).

08066S0004EM

Attaching Filler Tube To DeflatedTire

1— Sealant Cartridge2— Filler Tube

08066S0006EM

Center Console Power Outlet

186

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

6. Inflate the tire to the pressureindicated on the tire placard, located onthe driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edgeof the driver’s side door. Refer to “Tires”in “Servicing And Maintenance” formore information. In order to obtain amore precise reading, check thepressure value on pressure gauge withthe compressor off.

7. If the pressure is not at least26.1 psi (1.8 bar) after 15 minutes,disengage the compressor from thevalve and power outlet. Then, move thevehicle forwards approximately five tireturns in order to distribute the sealingfluid inside the tire evenly, and thenrepeat the inflation operation.

8. If you still cannot obtain a pressureof at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within15 minutes from the compressorswitching on, do not drive the vehicle,and contact an authorized dealer.

9. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles(8 km), stop, engage the electricparking brake, and recheck the tirepressure.

10. If the pressure is less than 26 psi(1.8 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle,and see an authorized dealer.

11. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi(1.8 bar) is detected, restore the correctpressure (with engine running andelectric parking brake engaged), anddrive immediately with great care to anauthorized dealer.

Warning!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tirerepair. Have the tire inspected and repairedor replaced after using Tire Service Kit.Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until thetire is repaired or replaced. Failure to followthis warning can result in injuries that areserious or fatal to you, your passengers,and others around you. Have the tirechecked as soon as possible at yourauthorized dealer.

12. Apply the adhesive label from thesealant bottle where it can be easilyseen by the driver as a reminder thatthe tire has been treated with a TireRepair Kit, as well as not to exceed thespeed restriction for the treated tire.

Warning!

Do not adhere the speed restriction stickerto the padded area on the steering wheel.Adhering the speed restriction sticker tothe padded area on the steering wheel isdangerous because the air bag may notoperate (deploy) normally resulting inserious injury. In addition, do not adherethe sticker to areas where warning lights orthe speedometer cannot be viewed.

08066S0005EM

Air Compressor

5— Power Switch6— Pressure Gauge

187

Checking And RestoringTire Pressure

The compressor can also be used tocheck and, if necessary, restore the tirepressure.Proceed as follows:

1. Release the quick connector andconnect it directly to the valve of the tireto be inflated.

2. Push the air release button.

Sealant CartridgeReplacementNote: Only use original cartridges,which can be purchased at anauthorized dealer.

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the sealant cartridge bypushing the release button located onthe side of the compressor.

2. Insert the new sealant cartridge bypushing downward firmly.

JUMP STARTINGIf your vehicle has a discharged battery,it can be jump started using a set ofjumper cables and a battery in anothervehicle, or by using a portable batterybooster pack. Jump starting can bedangerous if done improperly, so pleasefollow the procedures in this sectioncarefully.Note: When using a portable batterybooster pack, follow the manufacturer'soperating instructions and precautions.

Warning!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the batteryis frozen. It could rupture or explode andcause personal injury.

Caution!

Do not use a portable battery booster packor any other booster source with a systemvoltage greater than 12 Volts or damage tothe battery, starter motor, alternator orelectrical system may occur.

08066S0008EM

Air Compressor Components

7— Air Release Button8— Quick Connector9— Release Button

08066S0009EM

Sealant Cartridge Replacement

1— Sealant Cartridge9— Release Button

188

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Remote BatteryConnection Posts

The remote posts of the battery forjump starting can be found inside theengine compartment. The battery itselfis located in the luggage compartment.The negative terminal (-) is positionednext to the passenger side hood lock.

Warning!

Do not connect the jumper cable to thenegative (-) post of the discharged battery.The resulting electrical spark could causethe battery to explode and could result inserious injury. Only use the specific groundpoint, do not use any other exposed metalparts.

The positive post (+) can be accessedby removing the cover, and opening theprotective flap.

To carry out the operation, you need tohave the correct cables to connect tothe battery of another vehicle or aportable battery booster pack to theremote posts of the discharged battery.Usually, these cables have terminals atthe ends and are identified by differentsheath colors (red = positive, black =negative).

Jump Starting

Warning!

Failure to follow this jump-startingprocedure could result in personal injury orproperty damage due to battery explosion.

Caution!

Failure to follow these procedures couldresult in damage to the charging systemof the booster vehicle or the dischargedvehicle.

Preparation For Jump Starting:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake, andcycle the ignition to OFF.

2. Switch off all electrical features in thevehicle.

3. If using another vehicle to jump startthe battery, park the vehicle within thejumper cables reach, apply the park brakeand make sure the ignition cycled OFF.

Warning!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other asthis could establish a ground connection andpersonal injury could result.

08076S0006EM

Remote Negative Post Location

08076S0007EM

Protective Flap

08076S0001EM

Remote Positive Post Location

189

Cable ConnectionProceed as follows to perform a jumpstarting procedure:

1. Connect the positive (+) end of thejumper cable to the positive (+) post ofthe vehicle with the discharged battery

2. Connect the opposite end of thepositive (+) jumper cable to the positive(+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of thejumper cable to the negative (-) post ofthe booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of thenegative (-) jumper cable to a goodengine ground of the vehicle with thedischarged battery (exposed metal partof the engine) away from the batteryand the fuel injection system.

Warning!

Do not connect the jumper cable to thenegative (-) post of the discharged battery.The resulting electrical spark could causethe battery to explode and could result inserious injury. Only use the specific groundpoint, do not use any other exposed metalparts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle thathas the booster battery, let the engineidle a few minutes, and then start theengine in the vehicle with thedischarged battery. If using a portablebattery booster pack, before startingthe vehicle, wait a few seconds aftercompleting the connection.

Cable DisconnectionOnce the engine is started, remove theconnection cables in reverse sequence,as described below:

1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumpercable from the engine (-) ground of thevehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the negative end (-) ofthe jumper cable from the negative (-)post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the opposite end of thepositive (+) jumper cable from thepositive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the positive (+) end ofthe jumper cable from the positive (+)post of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.If frequent jump starting is required tostart your vehicle, you should have thebattery and charging system inspectedat your authorized dealer.

Caution!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle poweroutlets draw power from the vehicle’sbattery, even when not in use (i.e., cellularphones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough without engine operation, thevehicle’s battery will discharge sufficientlyto degrade battery life and/or prevent theengine from starting.

Bump Starting

Never jump start the engine by pushing,towing or coasting downhill.Note: You cannot start a vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushing it.

Caution!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle poweroutlets draw power from the vehicle’sbattery, even when not in use (i.e., cellularphones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough without engine operation, thevehicle’s battery will discharge sufficientlyto degrade battery life and/or prevent theengine from starting.

190

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

REFUELING INEMERGENCYRefueling in an emergency is describedin "Refueling The Vehicle" in "StartingAnd Operating".

ENGINEOVERHEATINGEngine overheating may occur insituations of extreme environmentaltemperatures, frequent enginestops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic.If the engine becomes overheated, theEngine Temperature Warning Light inthe instrument cluster will illuminatealong with a dedicated message. Referto "Warning Lights And Messages" inthe "Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel" for more information.In any of the following situations, youcan reduce the potential for overheatingby taking the appropriate action.

On the highways — slow down.

In city traffic — while stopped, placethe transmission in NEUTRAL, but donot increase engine idle speed.Note: There are steps that you cantake to slow down an impendingoverheat condition:

If your air conditioner (A/C) is on,turn it off. The A/C system adds heatto the engine cooling system andturning the A/C off can help removethis heat.

You can also turn the temperaturecontrol to maximum heat, the modecontrol to floor and the blower controlto high. This allows the heater core toact as a supplement to the radiatorand aids in removing heat from theengine cooling system.

Warning!

You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, do not openthe hood until the radiator has had time tocool. Never try to open a cooling systempressure cap when the radiator or coolantbottle is hot.

Caution!

Driving with a hot cooling system coulddamage your vehicle. If temperature gaugereads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle.Idle the vehicle with the air conditionerturned off until the pointer drops back intothe normal range. If the pointer remains onthe “H”, turn the engine off immediately,and call for service.

191

If Steam Is Coming From TheEngine CompartmentDo not go near the front of the vehicle.Stop the engine. Wait until the steamdissipates. Then, open the hood andstart the engine.If Neither Coolant Nor Steam IsEscapingOpen the hood and idle the engine untilit cools.

Note:

If the cooling fan does not operatewhile the engine is running, the enginetemperature will increase. Stop theengine and contact your authorizeddealer.

If the engine continues to overheator frequently overheats, have thecooling system inspected. The enginecould be seriously damaged unlessrepairs are made. Contact yourauthorized dealer.

TOWING ADISABLED VEHICLEThis section describes procedures fortowing a disabled vehicle using acommercial towing service.

Caution!

The vehicle should be transported withall four wheels OFF the ground on theflatbed of a roadside assistance vehicle.Avoid towing with only the front (or rear)wheels lifted. When towing with only thefront (or rear) wheels lifted, in addition todamaging the body, it could damage thetransmission.

Do not use sling-type equipment whentowing. Vehicle damage may occur.

When securing the vehicle to a flatbedtruck, do not attach to front or rearsuspension components. Damage to yourvehicle may result from improper towing.

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake isreleased, and remain released, while beingtowed.

Damage from improper towing is notcovered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

The operators of the assistance vehiclemust be informed with regard to thevehicle's minimum height from groundin order to avoid contact between theends of the bumpers with theequipment of the breakdown truck.The following image illustrates the frontand rear attachment corners of thevehicle, to be taken into considerationwhen loading the vehicle on theassistance vehicle.

RWDModels

AWDModels

A 12.880° 15.160°

B 17.105° 18.400°

08126S0001EM

Front And Rear Loading Angles

192

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)Models

It is recommended to tow the vehiclewith all four wheels OFF the ground onthe flatbed of a roadside assistancevehicle.

Caution!

Do not use sling type equipment whentowing. Vehicle damage may occur.

When securing the vehicle to a flat bedtruck, do not attach to front or rearsuspension components. Damage to yourvehicle may result from improper towing.

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake isreleased, and remains released, whilebeing towed.

If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed isnot available, the vehicle must betowed with the rear wheels lifted fromthe ground using a trailer or specialequipment allowing lifting of the rearwheels.

Four-Wheel Drive (AWD)Models

It is recommended to tow the vehiclewith all four wheels OFF the ground onthe flatbed of a roadside assistancevehicle.

Caution!

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage tothe drivetrain will result.

DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of atowing dolly can cause significant damageto your vehicle.Towing this vehicle in violation of theabove requirements can cause severetransmission damage. Damage fromimproper towing is not covered under theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

TOW EYESIf the vehicle has been in an accident orhas broken down, a tow eye is providedin the tools container located inside theluggage compartment for vehicletowing. Towing is meant only for shortdistances on a paved road surface.Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:

1. Unhook the cap on the front or rearbumper (if equipped), pushing on theupper part.

08136S0001EM

Front Tow Eye Cap

193

2. Remove the tow eye from itshousing in the trunk and carefully cleanthe threaded housing on the vehiclebefore using it.

3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye inplace (about 11 turns).Note: The largest work angle of a towcable to fix on the tow hook must notexceed 15°.

Warning!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling withtow eyes.

Do not use a chain with a tow eye.Chains may break, causing serious injury ordeath.

Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye.Tow straps may break or becomedisengaged, causing serious injury ordeath.

Failure to follow proper tow eye usagemay cause components to break resultingin serious injury or death.

Caution!

The tow eye must be used exclusivelyfor roadside assistance operations. Onlyuse the tow eye with an appropriate devicein accordance with the highway code(a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehiclefor a short distance to the nearest servicelocation.

Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to towvehicles off the road or where there areobstacles.

In compliance with the aboveconditions, towing with a tow eye musttake place with two vehicles (one towing,the other towed) aligned as much aspossible along the same center line.Damage to your vehicle may occur if theseguidelines are not followed.

When towing, only use a facility that cantow vehicles with low ground clearances asextensive damage can result by using astandard tow truck platform.

08136S0003EM

Rear Tow Eye Cap08136S0002EM

Work Angle Of Tow Cable

194

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

ENHANCEDACCIDENTRESPONSE SYSTEM(EARS)This vehicle is equipped with anEnhanced Accident Response System.Please refer to “Occupant RestraintSystems” in “Safety” for furtherinformation on the Enhanced AccidentResponse System (EARS) function.

EVENT DATARECORDER (EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an EventData Recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record datathat will assist in understanding how avehicle’s systems performed undercertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle.Please refer to “Occupant RestraintSystems” in “Safety” for furtherinformation on the Event Data Recorder(EDR).

195

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits theperformance of the vehicle to bemaintained over time, as well as limitedrunning costs and safeguarding theefficiency of the safety systems.

This chapter explains how.

SCHEDULED SERVICING. . . . . . .197ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . .201BATTERY RECHARGING . . . . . . .204DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . .205RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . .212TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212DEPARTMENT OFTRANSPORTATION UNIFORMTIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . .228STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .229BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

196

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

SCHEDULEDSERVICINGCorrect servicing is crucial forguaranteeing a long life for the vehicleunder the best conditions.For this reason, Alfa Romeo hasplanned a series of checks and servicesfor your vehicle at fixed intervals basedon distance and time, as described inthe Scheduled Servicing Plan.Before each service, it is alwaysnecessary to carefully follow theinstructions in the Scheduled ServicingPlan (e.g. periodically check level offluids, tire pressure, etc.).Scheduled Servicing is offered by anauthorized dealer according to a settime schedule. If, during eachoperation, in addition to the onesscheduled, the need arises for furtherreplacements or repairs, these may becarried out with the owner’s explicitconsent only.Note: Scheduled Servicing intervalsare required by the Manufacturer.Failure to have them carried out mayinvalidate the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.You are advised to inform yourauthorized dealer of any small operatingirregularities without waiting for the nextservice.

Periodic Checks

Every month or every 600 miles(1,000 km) or before long trips checkand, if necessary, top off:

Engine coolant level.Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see

your authorized dealer as soon aspossible).

Windshield washer fluid level.Tire inflation pressure and condition.Operation of lighting system

(headlights, direction indicators, hazardwarning lights, etc.).

Operation of windshield washing/wiping system and positioning/wear ofwiper blades.Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km),check and top off if required:

Engine oil level.

Heavy Usage Of TheVehicle

If the vehicle is used under one of thefollowing conditions:

Dusty roads.Short, repeated journeys less than

4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outsidetemperatures.

Engine often idling or driving longdistances at low speeds or long periodsof inactivity.

In the event of a long period ofinactivity.

The following checks must be carriedout more often than indicated in theScheduled Servicing Plan:

Check cleanliness of hood and trunklocks, cleanliness and lubrication oflinkage.

Visually inspect conditions of: engine,transmission, pipes and hoses(exhaust/fuel system/brakes) andrubber elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.).

Check battery charge and batteryfluid level (electrolyte).

Visually inspect conditions of theaccessory drive belts.

Check and, if necessary, changeengine oil and replace oil filter.

Check and, if necessary, replacecabin air filter.

Check and, if necessary, replace aircleaner.Severe Duty All ModelsChange Engine Oil at 4,000 miles(6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in adusty and off-road environment or isoperated predominately at idle or onlyvery low engine RPM’s. This type ofvehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

197

Maintenance Plan (2.0 T4 MAir Engine)

Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers 16 32 48 64 80 96 112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary.Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expire date

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, directionindicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passengercompartment, glove compartment, instrument panelwarning lights, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels(1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool)and, if equipped, engine oil degradation(2)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuelsystem, brakes), rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer systemand adjust nozzles, if necessary

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact.(2) If oil degradation ratio (data collectable from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacement is recommended.

198

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartmentlocks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear discbrake pads and operation of pad wear indicators

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of theaccessory drive belt(s)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change engine coolant ●

Change engine oil and replace oil filter (3)

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ●

Replace accessory drive belt/s (4)

Replace air cleaner cartridge(5) ● ● ● ● ●

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light ormessage in the instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles.

(4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dustyareas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless ofthe mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years.

(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

199


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Change the brake fluid (6)

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner(5) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o

Spark plug replacement* ● ● ● ● ●

(6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).*The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.(o) Recommended operations(●) Mandatory operations

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the rightequipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.This could cause an accident.

200

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

ENGINE COMPARTMENTChecking Levels2.0 T4 MAir engine

09026S0002EM

1 – Engine Oil Filler Cap 4 –Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap

201

Engine OilThe engine oil level can be seen on theinstrument cluster display every timethe engine is started, or on theInformation and Entertainment systemdisplay by activating on the main menu(MENU button) the following functionsin sequence: “Apps”; “My Car” and “OilLevel”.Check on the display using the6 notches that the oil level is betweenthe MIN and MAX level: 1 notch MINlevel, 6 notches MAX level.If the oil level is close to or below theMIN mark, add oil gradually through thefiller, (refer to “Top-Up And Oil LevelIndication Update On Display” in thissection) considering that each notchshown on the display corresponds toapproximately 8.8 fl oz (250 ml).

Caution!

Make sure not to add too much oil whentopping off the engine. Engine oil in excessmay damage the engine. Have the vehiclechecked. Never exceed the MAX levelwhen topping off engine oil.

Caution!

The oil level is not refreshed immediately onthe display after topping off. Consequently,wait for the oil level to be refreshed on thedisplay and follow the procedure below.

Note: Always reinstall the oil cap andtighten to proper torque whenever it isremoved to add oil to engine. Never runthe engine with cap removed this couldcause oil to leak from engine.

Top-Up And Oil Level IndicationUpdate On DisplayIf a engine oil top-off is needed, in orderto ensure the correct indication of theoil level on the display, leave the vehicleon flat ground with the engine runningfor approximately 5 minutes(temperature higher than 176°F (80°C))and shut the engine off then proceedwith the process below:

Start the engine again and idle it forabout five minutes.Note: If you have added the specifiedamount of oil and the indicator is notreading “Full”, please contact youauthorized dealer.

Warning!

If the engine oil is being topped up, wait forthe engine to cool down before looseningthe filler cap, particularly for vehicles withaluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING:risk of burns!

Caution!

The oil level must never exceed the MAXmark.

If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (lastnotch on the right turns red) after the fill-up,go to your authorized dealer as soon aspossible to have the oil in excess removed.

Do not add oil with specificationsdifferent from those of the oil already in theengine.

Used engine oil and oil filters containsubstances which are harmful to theenvironment. To change the oil and filters,we advise you to contact your authorizeddealer.

202

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Engine Coolant FluidIf the level is too low, unscrew the capof reservoir and add the fluid describedin the "Technical Specifications"chapter.

Washer Fluid ForWindshield/HeadlightsThe windshield and headlights washerfluid reservoir (if equipped) has atelescopic filler.If the level is too low, remove reservoircap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluiddescribed in the "TechnicalSpecifications" chapter.Note: The headlight washing systemwill not work if the liquid level is low (asindicated by the symbol on theinstrument cluster display). Thewindshield washer will keep working.On vehicles equipped with headlightwashers, if equipped, there is areference notch on the dipstick: ONLYthe windshield/rear window washeroperates with the level below thisreference.

Brake FluidCheck that the fluid is at the maximumlevel. If the fluid level in the tank is low,contact your authorized dealer to havethe system checked.

Automatic TransmissionActivation System Oil

The transmission control oil level shouldonly be checked at your authorizeddealer.

Useful Advice ForExtending The Life OfYour Battery

To avoid draining your battery andmake it last longer, observe thefollowing instructions:

When you park the car, ensure thatthe doors and trunk are closed properlyto prevent any lights from remaining oninside the passenger's compartment.

Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio,hazard warning lights, etc.) switched onfor a long time when the engine is notrunning.

Before performing any operation onthe electrical system, disconnect thenegative battery cable.If you wish to install electrical accessoriesafter purchasing the car that requirepermanent electrical supply (e.g. alarm,etc.), or accessories which influence theelectrical supply requirements, contactyour authorized dealer, whose qualifiedstaff will evaluate the overall electricalconsumption.

Caution!

If the charge level remains under 50% for along time, the battery may be damaged bysulphation, reducing its capacity andefficiency at start the vehicle. The battery isalso more prone to the risk of freezing(at temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C).

Note: After the battery is disconnected,the steering must be initialized. The

warning light on the instrumentpanel switches on to indicate this.To carry out this procedure, simply turnthe steering wheel all the way from oneend to the other, and then turn it backto the central position.

BatteryThe battery does not require theelectrolyte to be topped up with distilledwater. A periodic check carried out atan authorized dealer, however, isnecessary to check efficiency.Follow the battery manufacturer'sinstructions for maintenance.

Replacing The BatteryIf necessary, replace the battery withanother original battery with the samespecifications. Follow the batterymanufacturer’s instructions formaintenance.

203

Warning!

Battery acid is a corrosive solution andcan burn or even blind you. Do not allowbattery acid to contact your eyes, skin, orclothing. Do not lean over a battery whenattaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyesor on skin, flush the area immediately withlarge amounts of water. Refer to “JumpStarting” in “In Case Of Emergency” forfurther information.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive.Keep flame or sparks away from thebattery. Do not use a booster battery orany other booster source with an outputgreater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cableclamps to touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after handling.

Note: It will not be possible to openthe trunk with a key or by pressing thebutton in the passenger compartmentwhen the battery is disconnected.So, always position the manual trunkopening strap on the trunk lock beforedisconnecting the battery. Theprocedure is described in the "StoringThe Vehicle" paragraph in this chapter.

BATTERYRECHARGINGImportant Notes

Warning!

Never charge or recharge a frozenbattery: it may explode because of thenitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals.

At all times while charging or rechargingthe battery, make sure that any sparks oropen flames are kept sufficiently far awayfrom the battery.

Note:

Before using the charging device,always make sure that it is appropriatefor the installed battery, with constantvoltage (below 14.8 V) and lowamperage (maximum 15 A).

Recharge the battery in a wellventilated environment.

Before using any devices to chargeor to maintain the charge of thebattery, carefully follow the instructionsprovided with the device in order toproperly and safely connect it to thecar battery.

You can recharge the battery withoutdisconnecting the wires of the vehicle'selectrical system.

To reach the battery, remove theaccess panel inside the trunk.

Remove the protective cover andconnect the positive cable terminal ofthe charger (usually red) to the positiveterminal (+) of the battery.

Connect the negative terminal of thecharger (usually black) to nut next to thenegative terminal (-) of the battery.

09036S0001EM

Battery Access Panel

204

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

The vehicle is equipped with an IBS(Intelligent Battery Sensor), which isable to measure the charge anddischarge voltage and calculate thecharge level and the general conditionof the battery. The sensor is placed nextto the negative terminal (-) of thebattery.

For a correct charge/dischargeprocedure, the charge voltage must gothrough the IBS sensor.

1. Turn the charger on and follow theinstructions on the user's manual tocompletely recharge the battery.

2. When the battery is charged, turnthe charger off before disconnecting itfrom the battery.

3. Disconnect the black cable terminalof the battery charger and then the redcable terminal.

4. Refit the protective cover of thepositive terminal of the battery and theaccess cover to the batterycompartment.Note: If a "quick-type" battery chargeris used with the battery fitted on thevehicle, before connecting it disconnectboth cables of the battery itself. Do notuse a "quick-type" battery charger toprovide the starting voltage.

DEALER SERVICEThe following pages containinstructions on the requiredmaintenance from the technicalpersonnel who designed the vehicle.In addition to these specificmaintenance instructions specified forroutine scheduled servicing, there areother components which may requireperiodic maintenance or replacementover the vehicle’s life cycle.

Engine Oil

Engine Oil Level CheckTo ensure correct engine lubrication,the oil must always be kept at theprescribed level (see "EngineCompartment" in this chapter).Check the oil level at regular intervals,for example every 1864 miles(3000 km).It must be checked about five minutesafter stopping the engine, once fulloperating temperature is reached.The vehicle must also be parked on aslevel a surface as possible.

09036S0002EM

Battery

1 — Protective Cover2 — Negative Post (Nut)

205

The engine oil level can be checkedusing the Information and Entertainmentsystem. To access the function, activatethe main menu (MENU button) andselect the following options insequence: “Applications”; “My Car”;“Oil level”.

Changing The Engine OilSee the "Maintenance Plan" for thecorrect servicing intervals.

Choice Of Engine Oil TypeTo ensure optimal performance andmaximum protection in all operatingconditions, it is advisable to use solelycertified engine oils (see description in"Fluid And Lubricants" in the "TechnicalSpecifications" chapter).

Additives For Engine OilIt is strongly recommended not to useadditives (other than leak detectiondyes) with the engine oil.The engine oil is a product designedspecially for the vehicle and itsperformance may be deterioratedthrough the use of further additives.

Disposal Of Used Engine Oil AndFiltersFor the disposal of the engine oil andfilters, contact the appropriate body todetermine local regulations.Note: Used engine oil disposed ofincorrectly may seriously harm theenvironment.

Engine Oil Filter

Replacing The Engine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter must be replacedeach time the engine oil is changed. It isadvised to replace it with a genuinespare part, specifically designed for thisvehicle.

Air Filter

Replacing The Air CleanerSee the "Maintenance Plan" for thecorrect servicing intervals. It is advisedto replace it with a genuine spare part,specifically designed for this vehicle.

Air Conditioning SystemMaintenance

To ensure the best possibleperformance, the air conditioningsystem must be checked and undergomaintenance at an authorized dealer atthe beginning of the summer.

Caution!

Do not use chemicals to clean the airconditioning system, since the internalcomponents may be damaged. This kindof damage is not covered by warranty.

Replace The Cabin Air FilterSee the "Maintenance Plan" for thecorrect servicing intervals. For cleanerreplacement, contact an authorizeddealer.

Warning!

Use only refrigerants and compressorlubricants approved by the manufacturerfor your air conditioning system. Someunapproved refrigerants are flammableand can explode, injuring you. Otherunapproved refrigerants or lubricants cancause the system to fail, requiring costlyrepairs. Refer to Warranty InformationBook, located in your owner’s informationkit, for further warranty information.

Lubricating MovingParts Of The Bodywork

Ensure that the locks and bodyworkjunction points, including componentssuch as the seat guides, door hinges(and rollers), trunk and hood areperiodically lubricated with lithium-basedgrease to ensure correct, silent operationand to protect them from rust and wear.Thoroughly clean the components,eliminating every trace of dirt and dust.After lubricating, eliminate excess oiland grease. Also pay particularattention to the hood closingdevices, to ensure correct operation.

206

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

During operations on the hood, to becarried out with the engine cold, alsoremember to check, clean and lubricatethe locking, release and safety devices.Lubricate the external lock barrels twicea year. Apply a small amount ofhigh-quality lubricant directly into thelock barrel.If necessary, contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Windshield Wiper

Periodically clean the windshield andrear window and rubber profile of thewindshield wiper blades, using asponge or a soft cloth and anon-abrasive detergent. This eliminatesthe salt or impurities accumulated whendriving.Prolonged operation of the windshieldwindow wipers with dry glass maycause the deterioration of the blades, inaddition to abrasion of the surface ofthe glass. To eliminate the impurities onthe dry glass, always operate thewindshield washers.In the event of very low outdoortemperatures, below zero degrees,ensure that the movement of the rubberpart in contact with the glass is notobstructed. Use a suitable deicingproduct to release it if required.Avoid using the windshield wipers toremove frost or ice.

Also avoid contact of the rubber profileof the blades with petroleum derivativessuch as engine oil, gas, etc.

Warning!

Driving with worn windshield wiper bladesis a serious hazard, because visibility isreduced in bad weather conditions.

Note: The life of the windshield wiperblades varies according to the usagefrequency. In any case, it is advised toreplace the blades approximately oncea year. When the blades are worn,noise, marks on the glass or streaks ofwater may be noticed. In the presenceof these conditions, clean thewindshield wiper blades or, ifnecessary, replace them.

Raising The Windshield WiperBlades ("Service Position"Function)The "service position" function allowsthe driver to replace the windshieldwiper blades more easily. It is alsorecommended to activate this functionwhen it is snowing and to make it easierto remove any dirt deposits in the areawhere the blades are normallypositioned, when washing.

Activation Of The FunctionTo activate this function, disable thewindshield wiper before setting theignition device to STOP.This function can only be activatedwithin two minutes of cycling theignition to STOP.To activate this function, move the leverupward for at least three seconds.

Function DeactivationThe function is deactivated if:

More than two minutes passesbefore cycling the ignition to the STOPposition after having raised the leverand putting the wipers into serviceposition.

The ignition is cycled to the ONposition and the windshield wipercontrol is used.

09046S0001EM

Windshield Wiper Stalk

207

If, after using the function, the ignition isset back to ON with the blades in aposition other than rest position (at thebase of the windshield), they will onlyreturn to rest position following acommand given using the stalk (stalkupwards, into unstable position) orwhen a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) isexceeded.

Replacing The Windshield WiperBladesProceed as follows:

1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab ofthe attachment spring and remove theblade from the arm.

2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tabin the dedicated housing in the arm andchecking that it is locked.

3. Lower the wiper arm onto thewindshield.

Note: Do not operate the windshieldwiper with the blades lifted from thewindshield.

Windshield WasherThe window washer nozzles are fixed.If there is no jet of fluid, first check thatthere is fluid in the reservoir (seeparagraph “Engine Compartment” inthis chapter).

Then, check that the nozzle holes arenot clogged; use a needle to unblockthem if necessary.

Exhaust System

Adequate maintenance of the engineexhaust system represents the bestprotection against leaks of carbonmonoxide into the passengercompartment.

If an unusual noise from the exhaust orthe presence of smoke in the passengercompartment is identified, or if theunderbody or rear section of the vehiclehave been damaged, have the entireexhaust system and adjoining bodyworkareas checked at your authorized dealerto identify any components which arebroken, damaged, worn or have movedfrom their correct fitting position.Open welding or loose connectionsmay permit exhaust gas to enter thepassenger compartment.Have the exhaust system checked everytime the vehicle is raised. Replace thecomponents where necessary (for theseoperations, contact an authorizeddealer).In normal operating conditions, thecatalytic converter does not requiremaintenance. To ensure that it operatescorrectly, however, and prevent it fromgetting damaged, it is extremelyimportant that the engine operatesperfectly.To minimize the risk of damaging thecatalytic converter, proceed as follows:

Do not stop the engine or deactivatethe ignition with gear engaged andvehicle in motion.

Do not attempt to start the engineby bump starting.

Do not persist in using the vehicle ifidling is very irregular or the operatingconditions are very notably irregular.

09046S0002EM

Wiper Release Tab

09046S0003EM

Windshield Washers

1 — Washer Nozzles

208

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Warning!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. Theycontain carbon monoxide (CO), which iscolorless and odorless. Breathing it canmake you unconscious and can eventuallypoison you.

A hot exhaust system can start a fire ifyou park over materials that can burn.Such materials might be grass or leavescoming into contact with your exhaustsystem. Do not park or operate yourvehicle in areas where your exhaust systemcan contact anything that can burn.

Cooling System

Warning!

Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fanmotor lead before working near the radiatorcooling fan.

You or others can be badly burned byhot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steamfrom your radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, do not openthe hood until the radiator has had time tocool. Never open a cooling systempressure cap when the radiator or coolantbottle is hot.

Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelryaway from the radiator cooling fan whenthe hood is raised. The fan startsautomatically and may start at any time,whether the engine is running or not.

When working near the radiator coolingfan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turnthe ignition to the OFF mode. The fan istemperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition is in the ON mode.

You or others can be badly burned byhot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steamfrom your radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, do not openthe hood until the radiator has had time tocool. Never try to open a cooling systempressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Coolant CheckYour vehicle has two cooling systemsand they both need to be checked toensure they are at proper fill levels.Refer to the “Engine Compartment”section for the locations.Check the engine coolant andintercooler coolant level every oilchange or before long trips.If there are impurities in the enginecoolant, the system must be drained,flushed and refilled: contact anauthorized dealer.Check the front part of the condenser tocheck for any build-up of insects, leavesor other debris. Should it be dirty, clean itby spraying delicately with water.

Check the hoses of the engine/intercooler cooling system to ensurethat the rubber has not deterioratedand that there are no cracks, tears, cutsor obstructions in the expansion tankside and radiator side connectors.Should there be any doubt regardingleaks from the system (e.g. if frequenttop ups are required), have the sealchecked at an authorized dealer.With the engine off and at normaloperating temperature, check that thecooling system radiator cap is closedproperly.

Warning!

Do not open hot engine cooling system.Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) whenthe engine is overheated. Do not loosen orremove the cap to cool an overheatedengine. Heat causes pressure to build up inthe cooling system. To prevent scalding orinjury, do not remove the pressure capwhile the system is hot or under pressure.

Do not use a pressure cap other thanthe one specified for your vehicle. Personalinjury or engine damage may result.

Note: Before removing the coolantreservoir cap, wait for the system tocool down.

209

Topping Up / Draining / FlushingThe Engine/Intercooler CoolantIf the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty,have cleaning and flushing carried outat an authorized dealer.See the "Maintenance Plan" for thecorrect servicing intervals.

Note:For topping up, use a fluid with the

same characteristics as thoseindicated in the "Fluids AndLubricants" table (see "TechnicalSpecifications" chapter).

Do not use pure water,alcohol-based coolants, corrosionsinhibitors or additional anti-rustproducts because they may beincompatible with the engine coolantand cause the clogging of the radiator.The use of propylene glycol-basedcoolant is also not recommended.

Engine Cooling/Intercooler SystemCapTo prevent loss of engine coolant, makesure that the expansion tank cap isclosed. If it is open, screw it completelyuntil you reach/hear the click.Periodically check the cap and clean itfrom any foreign bodies that may havedeposited on the external surface.

Warning!

Never add coolant with the engine hotor overheated.

Do not attempt to cool an overheatedengine by loosening or removing the cap.The heat causes a considerable increasein pressure in the cooling system.

To prevent damage to the engine, onlyuse the engine cooling circuit caps provided.

Disposal of Used CoolantDisposal of engine/intercooler coolant issubject to legal requirements: contactthe appropriate body to determine localregulations.

Note:To prevent the fluid from being

ingested by children or animals, do notkeep it in open containers or pour it onthe ground. If ingested, contact a doctorimmediately. Eliminate any traces of fluidfrom the ground immediately.

When the vehicle stops after a shorttrip, steam may be seen coming outfrom front of the hood. This is anormal phenomenon which is due tothe presence of rain, snow or a lot ofmoisture on the surface of the radiator.

With engine and system cold, donot top up with coolant beyond themaximum level indicated on thereservoir in the engine compartment.

Braking System

In order to guarantee the efficiency ofthe braking system, periodically checkits components; for this operation,contact an authorized dealer.See the "Maintenance Plan" for thecorrect servicing intervals.

Note: Driving with your foot resting onthe brake pedal may compromise itsefficiency, increasing the risk ofaccidents. When driving, never keepyour foot on the brake pedal and don’tput unnecessary strain on it to preventthe brakes from overheating: excesspad wear may cause damage to thebraking system.

When an insufficient oil level isdetected, contact an authorized dealerto have the system checked.

Always keep the cap of the brakefluid reservoir (in the enginecompartment) completely closed.

210

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Warning!

Use only manufacturer's recommendedbrake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”in “Technical Specifications” for furtherinformation. Using the wrong type of brakefluid can severely damage your brakesystem and/or impair its performance.The proper type of brake fluid for yourvehicle is also identified on the originalfactory installed hydraulic master cylinderreservoir.

To avoid contamination from foreignmatter or moisture, use only new brakefluid or fluid that has been in a tightlyclosed container. Keep the master cylinderreservoir cap secured at all times. Brakefluid in a open container absorbs moisturefrom the air resulting in a lower boilingpoint. This may cause it to boilunexpectedly during hard or prolongedbraking, resulting in sudden brake failure.This could result in a collision.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir canresult in spilling brake fluid on hot engineparts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.Brake fluid can also damage painted andvinyl surfaces, care should be taken toavoid its contact with these surfaces.

Do not allow petroleum based fluid tocontaminate the brake fluid. Brake sealcomponents could be damaged, causingpartial or complete brake failure. This couldresult in a collision.

Automatic Transmission

Use only a transmission oil with thesame characteristics as those indicatedin the "Fluids and Lubricants" table (see"Technical Specifications" chapter).

Special AdditivesDo not use any type of additive withthe automatic transmission oil. Theautomatic transmission oil is a productdesigned specially for this vehicle andits performance may be compromisedthrough the use of further additives.

Caution!

Do not use chemical flushes in yourtransmission as the chemicals can damageyour transmission components. Suchdamage is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Frequency of Oil ChangesIn normal vehicle operating conditions,it is not necessary to change thetransmission oil.

Caution!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit yourauthorized dealer immediately. Severetransmission damage may occur. Yourauthorized dealer has the proper tools toadjust the fluid level accurately.

Replacing The Battery

If necessary, replace the battery withanother battery with the samespecifications. It is advised to contactan authorized dealer for replacement.Follow the battery manufacturer'sinstructions for maintenance.Note: It will not be possible to openthe trunk with a key or by pressing thebutton in the passenger compartmentwhen the battery is disconnected.So, always position the manual trunkopening strap on the trunk lock beforedisconnecting the battery. Theprocedure is described in the "StoringThe Vehicle" section in this chapter.

211

RAISING THEVEHICLEIf the vehicle requires lifting, visit anauthorized dealer which is equippedwith shop jacks or jack arms.The vehicle lifting points are marked onthe side skirts with the symbols.

TIRESTire Safety Information

Tire safety information will coveraspects of the following information:Tire Markings, Tire IdentificationNumbers, Tire Terminology andDefinitions, Tire Pressures, and TireLoading.

Tire Markings

Note:

P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing isbased on U.S. design standards.P-Metric tires have the letter “P”molded into the sidewall precedingthe size designation. Example:P215/65R15 95H.

European — Metric tire sizing isbased on European design standards.Tires designed to this standard havethe tire size molded into the sidewallbeginning with the section width.The letter "P" is absent from thistire size designation. Example:215/65R15 96H.

LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizingis based on U.S. design standards.The size designation for LT-Metric tiresis the same as for P-Metric tires exceptfor the letters “LT” that are molded intothe sidewall preceding the sizedesignation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Temporary spare tires are designedfor temporary emergency use only.Temporary high pressure compactspare tires have the letter “T” or “S”molded into the sidewall precedingthe size designation. Example:T145/80D18 103M.

High flotation tire sizing is based onU.S. design standards and it beginswith the tire diameter molded into thesidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

09056S0001EM

Vehicle Lift Point Locations0601085395US

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOTSafety StandardsCode (TIN)

4 — MaximumLoad

2 — SizeDesignation

5 — MaximumPressure

3 — ServiceDescription

6 — Treadwear,Traction andTemperatureGrades

212

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

"R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure,vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

213

EXAMPLE:

Load Identification:Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

LL = Light load tire or

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with whitesidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on theoutboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will findit on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved forhighway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

214

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

EXAMPLE:

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

01 means the year 2001

Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the frontdoor.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has notbeen driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sittingfor a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (poundsper square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflationpressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on thetire placard.

Tire PlacardA label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loadingcapacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflationpressures.

215

Tire Loading And Tire PressureNote: The proper cold tire inflationpressure is listed on the driver’s sideB-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver'sside door.

Tire And Loading InformationPlacard

This placard tells you importantinformation about the:

1. Number of people that can becarried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for thefront, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tiremust not exceed the load carryingcapacity of the tire on your vehicle. Youwill not exceed the tire's load carryingcapacity if you adhere to the loadingconditions, tire size, and cold tireinflation pressures specified on the Tireand Loading Information placard in“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting AndOperating” section of this manual.Note: Under a maximum loadedvehicle condition, gross axle weightratings (GAWRs) for the front and rearaxles must not be exceeded. For furtherinformation on GAWRs, vehicle loading,and trailer towing, refer to “VehicleLoading” in the “Starting AndOperating” section of this manual.To determine the maximum loadingconditions of your vehicle, locate thestatement “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on theTire and Loading Information placard.The combined weight of occupants,cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight(if applicable) should never exceed theweight referenced here.

0806115150US

Example Tire Placard Location(Door)

0806115151US

Example Tire Placard Location(B-Pillar)

GUID-054900418-high.tif

Tire And Loading InformationPlacard

216

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Steps For Determining CorrectLoad Limit—(1) Locate the statement “Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXX kgor XXX lbs.” on your vehicle'splacard.(2) Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.Metric Example For Load LimitFor example, if “XXX” amount equals635 kg and there will be five 68 kgpassengers in your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) =295 kg) as shown in step 4.

Note:

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be transferredto your vehicle. The following tableshows examples on how to calculatetotal load, cargo/luggage, and towingcapacities of your vehicle with varyingseating configurations and number andsize of occupants. This table is forillustration purposes only and may notbe accurate for the seating and loadcarry capacity of your vehicle.

For the following example, thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 865 lbs(392 kg).

217

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance.Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

218

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Tires — GeneralInformation

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essentialto the safe and satisfactory operation ofyour vehicle. Four primary areas areaffected by improper tire pressure:

Safety and Vehicle Stability

Economy

Tread Wear

Ride Comfort

Safety

Warning!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerousand can cause collisions.

Underinflation increases tire flexing andcan result in overheating and tire failure.

Overinflation reduces a tire's ability tocushion shock. Objects on the road andchuckholes can cause damage that resultin tire failure.

Overinflated or underinflated tires canaffect vehicle handling and can failsuddenly, resulting in loss of vehiclecontrol.

Unequal tire pressures can causesteering problems. You could lose controlof your vehicle.

Unequal tire pressures from one side ofthe vehicle to the other can cause thevehicle to drift to the right or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to therecommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflationaffect the stability of the vehicle and canproduce a feeling of sluggish responseor over responsiveness in the steering.

Note:

Unequal tire pressures from side toside may cause erratic andunpredictable steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side toside may cause the vehicle to drift leftor right.

Fuel EconomyUnderinflated tires will increase tirerolling resistance resulting in higher fuelconsumption.Tread WearImproper cold tire inflation pressurescan cause abnormal wear patterns andreduced tread life, resulting in the needfor earlier tire replacement.Ride Comfort And Vehicle StabilityProper tire inflation contributes to acomfortable ride. Over-inflationproduces a jarring and uncomfortableride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure islisted on the driver's side B-Pillar or rearedge of the driver's side door.At least once a month:

Check and adjust tire pressure with agood quality pocket-type pressuregauge. Do not make a visual judgementwhen determining proper inflation. Tiresmay look properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated.

Inspect tires for signs of tire wear orvisible damage.

Caution!

After inspecting or adjusting the tirepressure, always reinstall the valve stemcap. This will prevent moisture and dirtfrom entering the valve stem, which coulddamage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on theplacard are always “cold tire inflationpressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure isdefined as the tire pressure after thevehicle has not been driven for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum ofthree hours. The cold tire inflationpressure must not exceed the maximuminflation pressure molded into the tiresidewall.

219

Check tire pressures more often ifsubject to a wide range of outdoortemperatures, as tire pressures varywith temperature changes.Tire pressures change by approximately1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of airtemperature change. Keep this in mindwhen checking tire pressure inside agarage, especially in the Winter.Example: If garage temperature = 68°F(20°C) and the outside temperature =32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflationpressure should be increased by 3 psi(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) forevery 12°F (7°C) for this outsidetemperature condition.Tire pressure may increase from 2 to6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation.DO NOT reduce this normal pressurebuild up or your tire pressure will be toolow.

Tire Pressures For High SpeedOperation

The manufacturer advocates driving atsafe speeds and within posted speedlimits. Where speed limits or conditionsare such that the vehicle can be drivenat high speeds, maintaining correct tireinflation pressure is very important.Increased tire pressure and reducedvehicle loading may be required forhigh-speed vehicle operation.

Refer to your authorized tire dealer ororiginal equipment vehicle dealer forrecommended safe operating speeds,loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

Warning!

High speed driving with your vehicle undermaximum load is dangerous. The addedstrain on your tires could cause them tofail. You could have a serious collision. Donot drive a vehicle loaded to the maximumcapacity at continuous speeds above75 mph (120 km/h).

Recommended Cold Tire InflationPressuresFor vehicle speeds below 100 mph(160 km/h), recommended cold tireinflation pressures are listed on the TireAnd Loading Information Placardlocated on driver’s side B-Pillar or therear edge of the driver's side door.When driving at speeds 100 mph(160 km/h) and above, increased tirepressures and reduced vehicle loadingare required for high-speed vehicleoperation.

For driving speeds above 100 mph(160 km/h) recommended cold tireinflation pressures are listed belowunder "High Speed Tire InflationPressure". Vehicle loading conditionmust not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg)(driver + three passengers + 88 lbs.(40kg) luggage).

Warning!

High speed driving with your vehicle undermaximum load is dangerous. The addedstrain on your tires could cause them tofail. You could have a serious collision.

220

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Tires Wheel

RecommendedCold Tire Inflation

Pressure

High Speed TireInflation Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear

Original Equippment

225/50R17 94V M+SRunflat 17x7.5J 32 psi/

220kpa35 psi/240kpa

39 psi/270kpa

44 psi/300kpa

225/45R18 91V M+SRunflat 18x8J 32 psi/

220kpa35 psi/240kpa

39 psi/270kpa

44 psi/300kpa

225/40R19 93V XL M+SRunflat 19x8J 35 psi/

240kpa38 psi/260kpa

39 psi/270kpa

42 psi/290kpa

225/40R19 89W Runflat 19x8J 35 psi/240kpa – 39 psi/

270kpa –

255/35R19 92W Runflat 19x9J – 34 psi/230kpa – 42 psi/

290kpa

Snow Tires

225/50R17 94V M+SRunflat 17x7.5J 32 psi/

220kpa35 psi/240kpa

39 psi/270kpa

44 psi/300kpa

225/45R18 91V M+SRunflat 18x8J 32 psi/

220kpa35 psi/240kpa

39 psi/270kpa

44 psi/300kpa

Radial Ply Tires

Warning!

Combining radial ply tires with other typesof tires on your vehicle will cause yourvehicle to handle poorly. The instabilitycould cause a collision. Always use radialply tires in sets of four. Never combinethem with other types of tires.

Tire RepairIf your tire becomes damaged, it maybe repaired if it meets the followingcriteria:

The tire has not been driven on whenflat.

The damage is only on the treadsection of your tire (sidewall damage isnot repairable).

The puncture is no greater than a ¼of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tirerepairs and additional information.Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flattires that have experienced a loss ofpressure should be replacedimmediately with another Run Flat tireof identical size and service description(Load Index and Speed Symbol).

221

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability todrive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph(80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflationpressure. This rapid loss of inflation isreferred to as the Run Flat mode. A RunFlat mode occurs when the tire inflationpressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flatmode it has limited driving capabilitiesand needs to be replaced immediately.A Run Flat tire is not repairable.It is not recommended driving a vehicleloaded at full capacity or to tow a trailerwhile a tire is in the run flat mode.See the tire pressure monitoring sectionfor more information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or iceconditions, do not spin your vehicle'swheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or forlonger than 30 seconds continuouslywithout stopping.

Warning!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.Forces generated by excessive wheelspeeds may cause tire damage or failure.A tire could explode and injure someone.Do not spin your vehicle's wheels fasterthan 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than

30 seconds continuously when you arestuck, and do not let anyone near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the originalequipment tires to help you indetermining when your tires should bereplaced.

These indicators are molded into thebottom of the tread grooves. They willappear as bands when the tread depthbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).When the tread is worn to the treadwear indicators, the tire should bereplaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires”in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependentupon varying factors including, but notlimited to:

Driving style.

Tire pressure - Improper cold tireinflation pressures can cause unevenwear patterns to develop across the tiretread. These abnormal wear patternswill reduce tread life, resulting in theneed for earlier tire replacement.

Distance driven.

Performance tires, tires with a speedrating of V or higher, and Summer tirestypically have a reduced tread life.Rotation of these tires per the vehiclescheduled maintenance is highlyrecommended.

Warning!

Tires and the spare tire should be replacedafter six years, regardless of the remainingtread. Failure to follow this warning canresult in sudden tire failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting inserious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dryplace with as little exposure to light aspossible. Protect tires from contact withoil, grease, and gasoline.

0806104865NA

Tire Tread

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire

222

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide abalance of many characteristics. Theyshould be inspected regularly for wearand correct cold tire inflation pressures.The manufacturer strongly recommendsthat you use tires equivalent to theoriginals in size, quality andperformance when replacement isneeded. Refer to the paragraph on“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section.Refer to the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the VehicleCertification Label for the sizedesignation of your tire. The Load Indexand Speed Symbol for your tire will befound on the original equipment tiresidewall.See the Tire Sizing Chart examplefound in the “Tire Safety Information”section of this manual for moreinformation relating to the Load Indexand Speed Symbol of a tire.It is recommended to replace the twofront tires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling. If youever replace a wheel, make sure thatthe wheel’s specifications match thoseof the original wheels.It is recommended you contact yourauthorized tire dealer or originalequipment dealer with any questionsyou may have on tire specifications or

capability. Failure to use equivalentreplacement tires may adversely affectthe safety, handling, and ride of yourvehicle.

Warning!

Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,or speed rating other than that specified foryour vehicle. Some combinations ofunapproved tires and wheels may changesuspension dimensions and performancecharacteristics, resulting in changes tosteering, handling, and braking of yourvehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandling and stress to steering andsuspension components. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting inserious injury or death. Use only the tireand wheel sizes with load ratings approvedfor your vehicle.

Never use a tire with a smaller loadindex or capacity, other than what wasoriginally equipped on your vehicle. Using atire with a smaller load index could result intire overloading and failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision.

Failure to equip your vehicle with tireshaving adequate speed capability canresult in sudden tire failure and loss ofvehicle control.

Caution!

Replacing original tires with tires of adifferent size may result in falsespeedometer and odometer readings.

Spare Tires — If EquippedNote: For vehicles equipped with TireRepair Kit instead of a spare tire, pleaserefer to “Tire Repair Kit” in “In Case OfEmergency” for further information.

Caution!

Because of the reduced ground clearance,do not take your vehicle through anautomatic car wash with a compact orlimited use temporary spare installed.Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching OriginalEquipped Tire And Wheel —If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with aspare tire and wheel equivalent in lookand function to the original equipmenttire and wheel found on the front or rearaxle of your vehicle. This spare tire maybe used in the tire rotation for yourvehicle. If your vehicle has this option,refer to an authorized tire dealer for therecommended tire rotation pattern.

223

Compact Spare Tire —If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporaryemergency use only. You can identify ifyour vehicle is equipped with acompact spare by looking at the sparetire description on the Tire and LoadingInformation Placard located on thedriver’s side door opening or on thesidewall of the tire. Compact spare tiredescriptions begin with the letter “T” or“S” preceding the size designation.Example: T145/80D18 103M.T, S = Temporary Spare TireSince this tire has limited tread life, theoriginal equipment tire should berepaired (or replaced) and reinstalled onyour vehicle at the first opportunity.Do not install a wheel cover or attemptto mount a conventional tire on thecompact spare wheel, since the wheelis designed specifically for the compactspare tire. Do not install more than onecompact spare tire and wheel on thevehicle at any given time.

Warning!

Compact and collapsible spares are fortemporary emergency use only. With thesespares, do not drive more than 50 mph(80 km/h). Temporary use spares havelimited tread life. When the tread is worn tothe tread wear indicators, the temporaryuse spare tire needs to be replaced.

Be sure to follow the warnings, which applyto your spare. Failure to do so could resultin spare tire failure and loss of vehiclecontrol.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporaryemergency use only. This tire may looklike the originally equipped tire on thefront or rear axle of your vehicle, but it isnot. This spare tire may have limitedtread life. When the tread is worn to thetread wear indicators, the temporaryuse full size spare tire needs to bereplaced. Since it is not the same asyour original equipment tire, replace(or repair) the original equipment tireand reinstall on the vehicle at the firstopportunity.

Limited Use Spare —If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is fortemporary emergency use only. This tireis identified by a label located on thelimited use spare wheel. This labelcontains the driving limitations for thisspare. This tire may look like the originalequipped tire on the front or rear axle ofyour vehicle, but it is not. Installation ofthis limited use spare tire affects vehiclehandling. Since it is not the same asyour original equipment tire, replace

(or repair) the original equipment tireand reinstall on the vehicle at the firstopportunity.

Warning!

Limited use spares are for emergency useonly. Installation of this limited use sparetire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,do not drive more than the speed listed onthe limited use spare wheel. Keep inflatedto the cold tire inflation pressures listed onyour Tire and Loading Information Placardlocated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or therear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace(or repair) the original equipment tire at thefirst opportunity and reinstall it on yourvehicle. Failure to do so could result in lossof vehicle control.

Wheel And Wheel TrimCare

All wheels and wheel trim, especiallyaluminum and chrome plated wheels,should be cleaned regularly using mild(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintaintheir luster and to prevent corrosion.Wash wheels with the same soapsolution recommended for the body ofthe vehicle.Your wheels are susceptible todeterioration caused by salt, sodiumchloride, magnesium chloride, calciumchloride, etc., and other road chemicalsused to melt ice or control dust on dirt

224

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge andmild soap to wipe away promptly. Donot use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.They can damage the wheel’sprotective coating that helps keep themfrom corroding and tarnishing.

Caution!

Avoid products or automatic car washesthat use acidic solutions or strong alkalineadditives or harsh brushes. Manyaftermarket wheel cleaners and automaticcar washes may damage the wheel'sprotective finish. Such damage is notcovered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Only car wash soap, MoparWheel Cleaner or equivalent isrecommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheelsincluding excessive brake dust, caremust be taken in the selection of tireand wheel cleaning chemicals andequipment to prevent damage to thewheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment orMopar Chrome Cleaner or theirequivalent is recommended or select anon-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner foraluminum or chrome wheels.

Caution!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, abristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner.These products may damage the wheel'sprotective finish. Such damage is notcovered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar WheelCleaner or equivalent is recommended.

Note: If you intend parking or storingyour vehicle for an extended periodafter cleaning the wheels with wheelcleaner, drive your vehicle and apply thebrakes to remove the water dropletsfrom the brake components. Thisactivity will remove the red rust on thebrake rotors and prevent vehiclevibration when braking.

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black SatinChrome, or Low Gloss Clear CoatWheels

Caution!

If your vehicle is equipped with thesespecialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheelcleaners, abrasives, or polishingcompounds. They will permanently damagethis finish and such damage is not coveredby the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAPAND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Usedon a regular basis; this is all that is requiredto maintain this finish.

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for allseasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, andWinter). Traction levels may varybetween different all season tires. Allseason tires can be identified by theM+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation onthe tire sidewall. Use all season tiresonly in sets of four; failure to do so mayadversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires— If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in bothwet and dry conditions, and are notintended to be driven in snow or on ice.If your vehicle is equipped with Summertires, be aware these tires are notdesigned for Winter or cold drivingconditions. Install Winter tires on yourvehicle when ambient temperatures areless than 40°F (5°C) or if roads arecovered with ice or snow. For moreinformation, contact an authorizeddealer.

225

Summer tires do not contain the allseason designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.Use Summer tires only in sets of four;failure to do so may adversely affect thesafety and handling of your vehicle.

Warning!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/iceconditions. You could lose vehicle control,resulting in severe injury or death. Drivingtoo fast for conditions also creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require theuse of snow tires during the Winter.Snow tires can be identified by a“mountain/snowflake” symbol on thetire sidewall.

If you need snow tires,select tires equivalentin size and type to theoriginal equipmenttires. Use snow tiresonly in sets of four;failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speedratings than what was originallyequipped with your vehicle and shouldnot be operated at sustained speedsover 75 mph (120 km/h). For speedsabove 75 mph (120 km/h) refer tooriginal equipment or an authorized tiredealer for recommended safe operatingspeeds, loading and cold tire inflationpressures.While studded tires improveperformance on ice, skid and tractioncapability on wet or dry surfaces maybe poorer than that of non-studdedtires. Some states prohibit studdedtires; therefore, local laws should bechecked before using these tire types.

Tire Chains (TractionDevices)Use of traction devices require sufficienttire-to-body clearance. Follow theserecommendations to guard againstdamage.

Note:

Traction device must be of propersize for the tire, as recommended bythe traction device manufacturer

Use on Rear Tires Only

Due to limited clearance, thefollowing traction devices arerecommended:

For a 255/35R19 tire, use of asnow traction device with a maximumprojection of 7 mm beyond the tireprofile is recommended.

For 225/50R17, 225/45R18 or225/40R19 tires, use of a snowtraction device with a maximumprojection of 9 mm beyond the tireprofile is recommended.

Caution!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction deviceclearance between tires and othersuspension components, it is importantthat only traction devices in good conditionare used. Broken devices can causeserious damage. Stop the vehicleimmediately if noise occurs that couldindicate device breakage. Remove thedamaged parts of the device before furtheruse.

Install device as tightly as possible andthen retighten after driving about ½ mile(0.8 km).

Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

Drive cautiously and avoid severe turnsand large bumps, especially with a loadedvehicle.

Do not drive for a prolonged period ondry pavement.

226

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Observe the traction devicemanufacturer’s instructions on the methodof installation, operating speed, andconditions for use. Always use thesuggested operating speed of the devicemanufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph(48 km/h).

Do not use traction devices on acompact spare tire.

Tire RotationRecommendations

Tires on the front and rear axles ofvehicles operate at different loads andperform different steering, driving, andbraking functions. For these reasons,they wear at unequal rates. Theseeffects can be reduced by timelyrotation of tires. Rotation will increasetread life, maintain traction levels andcontribute to a smooth, quiet ride.To resolve this problem, tires should berotated at each service interval(approximately every 10,000 miles[16,000km]). More frequent rotation ispermissible if desired. The reasons forany rapid or unusual wear should becorrected prior to rotation beingperformed.

Tire Rotations Not Recommended— If EquippedDue to different size tires and wheels onfront and rear axles tire rotation is notpossible for:

2.0T GME Engine Equipped with a225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 reartires.

Caution!

Damage to the vehicle may occur if225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 rear tiresare rotated

Tire rotation contributes to thepreservation of the grip and tractionperformance on wet, muddy or snowyroads, guaranteeing optimal driveabilityof the vehicle.In the case of irregular wear of the tiresidentify the cause and correct it as soonas possible, by contacting anauthorized dealer.Tire Rotation for Directional Tires —If EquippedDirectional tires are equipped on thefollowing:

2.0T GME Engine equipped withsame size tires and wheels on front andrear axles

The rotational direction of the tire mustbe taken into consideration whenrotating the tires. The recommendedrotation pattern for directional tires isshown below.

All Wheel Drive (AWD) ModelsIt is recommended to avoid situationswith a large difference in wear betweenthe front and rear tires and to strictlyuse winter tires of the sizes given on thetire placard.The AWD system and the original tiresare developed together to ensure thevehicle’s best performance. Whenchanging the tires, it is recommendedto us the same “AR” marked tires, tomaintain the same level of performanceand component life.

09066S0002EM

Tire Rotation

227

DEPARTMENT OFTRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIREQUALITY GRADESThe following tire gradingcategories were established by theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration. The specific graderating assigned by the tire'smanufacturer in each category isshown on the sidewall of the tireson your vehicle.All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal safetyrequirements in addition to thesegrades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is acomparative rating, based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actualconditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices, anddifferences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.These grades represent the tire'sability to stop on wet pavement,as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

Warning!

The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-aheadbraking traction tests, and doesnot include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat,when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds toa level of performance, which allpassenger vehicle tires must meetunder the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory testwheel, than the minimum requiredby law.

Warning!

The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

228

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

STORING THEVEHICLEIf the vehicle is left inactive for longerthan a month, the following precautionsshould be observed:

Park the vehicle in an area that iscovered and dry, and well-ventilated ifpossible. Slightly open the windows.

Check that the electric park brake isnot activated.

Carry out the procedure: “manualtrunk opening device” proceduredescribed in this paragraph.

Disconnect the negative batteryterminal and check the battery charge.Repeat this check once every threemonths during storage.

If the battery is not disconnectedfrom the electrical system, check itsstate of charge every thirty days.

Clean and protect the painted partsusing protective wax.

Clean and protect the shiny metalparts using special compoundsavailable commercially.

Sprinkle talcum powder on thewindshield wiper rubber blades, and liftthem off the glass.

Cover the vehicle with a fabric orperforated plastic sheet, payingparticular care not to damage thepainted surface by dragging any dustthat may have accumulated on it.

Do not use compact plastic sheets, asthey do not allow humidity to evaporatefrom the surface of the vehicle.

Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)above the standard prescribed pressureand check it periodically.

Do not drain the engine coolingsystem.

Any time the vehicle is left inactivefor two weeks or more, operate the airconditioning system with engine idlingfor at least five minutes, setting externalair and with fan set to maximum speed.This operation will ensure appropriatelubrication for the system, thusminimizing the possibility of damage tothe compressor when the system isoperated again.Note: After cycling the ignition toSTOP and having closed the driver sidedoor, wait at least one minute beforedisconnecting the electrical supply fromthe battery. When reconnecting theelectrical supply to the battery, makesure that the ignition is in the STOPposition and the driver side door isclosed.

Manual Trunk Opening DeviceProceed as follows if the battery needsto be disconnected:

1. From the trunk interior covering,rotate the plug to the left of the lockand extract the strap connected to it.

2. Make sure the free end of the strapremains outside the deck lid whenclosing the deck lid.

3. The trunk can now be openedmanually by pulling the strap.Note: This procedure must be carriedout exclusively in safe places because itallows to open the trunk unconditionally.

09086S0001EM

Trunk Compartment

229

BODYWORKProtection AgainstAtmospheric Agents

The vehicle is equipped with the bestavailable technological solutions toprotect the bodywork against corrosion.These include:

Painting products and systemswhich give the vehicle resistance tocorrosion and abrasion.

Use of galvanized (or pre-treated)steel sheets, with high resistance tocorrosion.

Spraying of plastic parts, with aprotective function in the more exposedpoints: underdoor, inner wing, edges,etc.

Use of “open” boxed sections toprevent condensation and pockets ofmoisture which could favor theformation of rust inside.

Use of special films to protectagainst abrasion in exposed areas(e.g. rear wing, doors, etc.).

Corrosion Warranty

Your vehicle is covered by CorrosionWarranty against perforation due to rustof any original element of the structureor bodywork. For the general terms ofthis warranty, refer to the WarrantyBooklet.

Preserving The Bodywork

PaintTouch up abrasions and scratchesimmediately to prevent the formation ofrust.Maintenance of paintwork consists ofwashing the car: the frequencydepends on the conditions andenvironment where the car is used. Forexample, it is advisable to wash thevehicle more often in areas with highlevels of atmospheric pollution or saltedroads.Some parts of the vehicle may becovered with a matte paint which, inorder to be maintained intact, requiresspecial care.To correctly wash the vehicle, followthese instructions:

If high pressure jets or cleaners areused to wash the vehicle, keep adistance of at least 15 inches (40 cm)from the bodywork to avoid damage oralteration. Build up of water couldcause damage to the vehicle in the longterm.

To make it easier to remove any dirtdeposits in the area where the bladesare normally located it is recommendedto position the windshield wipersvertically (service position), for moreinformation, refer to “Dealer Service” inthis chapter.

Wash the bodywork using a lowpressure jet of water if possible.

Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapysolution over the bodywork, frequentlyrinsing the sponge.

Rinse well with water and dry with aleather chamois.Dry the less visible parts (e.g. doorframes, hood, headlight frames, etc.)with special care, as water maystagnate more easily in these areas.Do not wash the car after it has beenleft in the sun or with the hood hot: thismay alter the shine of the paintwork.Exterior plastic parts must be cleanedin the same way as the rest of thevehicle.If washing the car in a service thatmoves the car, for cars with automatictransmissions, PARK (P) must be cutout. You have to shut off the engine inthe following conditions: car stopped,transmission in NEUTRAL (N), push thestarter button for at least threeseconds.Note: Avoid parking under trees; theresin dropped by trees makes thepaintwork go opaque and increases thepossibility of corrosion.

WindowsUse specific detergents and cleancloths to prevent scratching or alteringthe transparency.

230

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Caution!

Wipe the rear window inside gently with acloth following the direction of the filamentsto avoid damaging the heating device.

Front HeadlightsUse a soft cloth soaked in water anddetergent for washing cars.

Note:Never use aromatic substances

(e.g. gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone)for cleaning the plastic lenses of theheadlights.

When cleaning with a pressurewasher, keep the pressure washer atleast eight inches (20 cm) away fromthe headlights.

Engine CompartmentAt the end of every winter, wash theengine compartment thoroughly, takingcare not to aim the jet of water directlyat the electronic control units or at thewindshield wiper motors. Have thisoperation performed at a specializedworkshop.Note: The washing should take placewith the engine cold and the ignitiondevice in the STOP position. After thewashing operation, make sure that thevarious protections (e.g. rubber capsand guards) have not been removed ordamaged.

INTERIORSPeriodically check the cleanliness of theinterior, beneath the mats, which couldcause oxidation of the sheet metal.

Seats And Fabric Parts

Remove dust with a soft brush or avacuum cleaner. It is advised to use amoist brush on velvet upholstery. Rubthe seats with a sponge moistened witha solution of water and neutraldetergent.

Leather Seats — IfEquipped

Remove the dry dirt with a chamois orslightly damp cloth, without exerting toomuch pressure.Remove any liquid or grease stainsusing an absorbent dry cloth, withoutrubbing. Then clean with a soft cloth orbuckskin cloth dampened with waterand mild soap. If the stain persists, usespecific products and observe theinstructions carefully.Note: Never use alcohol. Make surethat the cleaning products used containno alcohol or alcohol derivatives, evenin small quantities.

Plastic And CoatedParts

Clean interior plastic parts with a dampcloth (if possible made from microfiber),and a solution of water and neutral,non-abrasive detergent.

To clean oily or persistent stains, usespecific products free from solvents anddesigned to maintain the originalappearance and color of thecomponents.Remove any dust using a microfibercloth, if necessary moistened withwater. The use of paper tissues is notrecommended as these may leaveresidues.

Genuine Leather Parts —If Equipped

Use only water and mild soap to cleanthese parts. Never use alcohol oralcohol-based products.Before using a specific product forcleaning interiors, make sure that itdoes not contain alcohol and/or alcoholbased substances.

Carbon Fiber Parts

To eliminate small scratches and markson the carbon, contact your authorizeddealer. An improperly performedoperation may irreparably damage thecarbon.

231

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Everything you may find useful forunderstanding how your vehicle ismade and works is contained in thischapter and illustrated with data, tablesand graphics. For the enthusiasts andthe technician, but also just for thosewho want to know every detail of theirvehicle.

IDENTIFICATION DATA. . . . . . . . .233ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . .235TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . .236BRAKES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238STEERING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . .239DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . .243FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . .245FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS. . . . . .246PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .247

232

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

IDENTIFICATIONDATAVehicle IdentificationNumberThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)is stamped on a plate on the front leftcorner of the dashboard cover, whichcan be seen from outside the vehicle,through the windshield.

This number is also printed on thechassis at the front left shock absorberand can be seen by opening the enginecompartment hood.

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) Plate

The plates are located on the left side Apillar and contain the data about:

Chassis number (VIN).Vehicle type (USA and Canada only).Color code.Place of manufacturing of the vehicle

(USA and Mexico only).Vehicle manufacturing date.Maximum permitted weights.Permitted tire inflation pressure

(USA and Canada only).

10016S0001EM

Vehicle Identification Number

10016S0002EM

Vehicle Identification Number

233

ENGINE

2.0 T4 MAir Engine 280 HP

Cycle Four

Number and position of cylinders 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84 / 89.9

Total displacement (cm³) 1,993

Compression ratio 10:1

Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280

Maximum power (kW) 209

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5200

Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 306

Maximum torque (Nm) 415

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2,000 – 4,800

Fuel Gasoline with an octane number (A.K.I.) 91,ethanol percentage is 0–15%.

234

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

POWER SUPPLY

Power Supply

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Electronic timed sequential injection with knock control

235

TRANSMISSION

Model Transmission Traction

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight forward gears plus reverseRear

orAll-wheel drive

236

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

BRAKES

Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

2.0 T4 MAir Engine Disc Disc Electric

Caution!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it isbetter to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

237

SUSPENSION

Model Front Rear

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Independent wheel double-wishbonesuspension Independent wheel with multilink system

238

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

STEERING SYSTEM

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type

2.0L T4 MAir Engine 35.50 ft (10.80 m) Rack and pinion with electric powersteering

239

DIMENSIONSDimensions

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured withvehicle unladen.

A B C D E F G H I

31.30 111.02 40.47 182.80 56.54(+)57.09(*)

61.30(+)61.38(*)

63.98(+)63.15(*)

79.69 73.23

(+) RWD models(*) AWD modelsSmall variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

10106S0001EM

240

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

Luggage Compartment Volume

Capacity (V.D.A. standards)

Rear seats not foldedVehicle unladen: 16.96 cubic feet

241

WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With AWD 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With RWD

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% andwithout optional equipment) 3632 3521

Payload including the driver (*) 905 905

Maximum permitted loads (**) 155 155

– front axle 2205 2205

– rear axle 2646 2646

– total 4723 4612

Towable loads – –

(*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximumpermitted loads.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permittedloads.

242

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

FUELREQUIREMENTS

This engine isdesigned to meet allemission regulations,and providesatisfactory fueleconomy andperformance, when

using high-quality unleaded “Regular”gasoline having a posted octanenumber of 91 as specified by the(R+M)/2 method. For optimumperformance and fuel economy the useof “Premium” 91 octane gasoline orhigher is recommended.While operating on gasoline with therequired octane number, hearing a lightknocking sound from the engine is nota cause for concern. However, if theengine is heard making a heavyknocking sound, see your dealerimmediately. Use of gasoline with alower than recommended octanenumber can cause engine failure andmay void or not be covered by theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.Poor quality gasoline can causeproblems such as hard starting, stalling,and hesitations. If you experience thesesymptoms, try another brand ofgasoline before considering service forthe vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require theuse of cleaner burning gasoline referredto as “Reformulated Gasoline”.Reformulated gasoline containsoxygenates and are specifically blendedto reduce vehicle emissions andimprove air quality.The use of reformulated gasoline isrecommended. Properly blendedreformulated gasoline will provideimproved performance and durability ofengine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/OxygenateBlends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleadedgasoline with oxygenates such asethanol.

Caution!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanolor gasoline containing more than 15%ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends mayresult in starting and drivability problems,damage critical fuel system components,cause emissions to exceed the applicablestandard, and/or cause the “MalfunctionIndicator Light” to illuminate. Pleaseobserve pump labels as they should clearlycommunicate if a fuel contains greater than15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from usinggasoline containing more than 15%ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containingmethanol are not the responsibility ofthe manufacturer and may void or notbe covered under New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

CNG And LP Fuel SystemModifications

Modifications that allow the engine torun on compressed natural gas (CNG)or liquid propane (LP) may result indamage to the engine, emissions, andfuel system components. Problems thatresult from running CNG or LP are notthe responsibility of the manufacturerand may void or not be covered underthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl ManganeseTricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that isblended into some gasoline to increaseoctane. Gasoline blended with MMTprovides no performance advantagebeyond gasoline of the same octanenumber without MMT. Gasoline blendedwith MMT reduces spark plug life andreduces emissions system performancein some vehicles. The manufacturerrecommends that gasoline withoutMMT be used in your vehicle.

243

The MMT content of gasoline may notbe indicated on the gasoline pump;therefore, you should ask your gasolineretailer whether the gasoline containsMMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal andCalifornia reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating, gasolines thatcontain detergents, corrosion andstability additives are recommended.Using gasolines that have theseadditives will help improve fueleconomy, reduce emissions, andmaintain vehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIERDetergent Gasolinecontains a higher levelof detergents to furtheraide in minimizingengine and fuel system

deposits. When available, the usage ofTop Tier Detergent gasoline isrecommended. Visitwww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.Indiscriminate use of fuel systemcleaning agents should be avoided.Many of these materials intended forgum and varnish removal may containactive solvents or similar ingredients.These can harm fuel system gasket anddiaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

Caution!

Follow these guidelines to maintain yourvehicle’s performance:

The use of leaded gasoline is prohibitedby Federal law. Using leaded gasoline canimpair engine performance and damagethe emissions control system.

An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel orignition malfunctions can cause thecatalytic converter to overheat. If you noticea pungent burning odor or some lightsmoke, your engine may be out of tune ormalfunctioning and may require immediateservice. Contact your authorized dealer forservice assistance.

The use of fuel additives, which are nowbeing sold as octane enhancers, is notrecommended. Most of these productscontain high concentrations of methanol.Fuel system damage or vehicleperformance problems resulting from theuse of such fuels or additives is not theresponsibility of the manufacturer and mayvoid or not be covered under the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

Note: Intentional tampering with theemissions control system can result incivil penalties being assessed againstyou.

244

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

FLUID CAPACITIES2.0 T4 MAir Engine

U.S. Metric

Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters

Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters

Engine cooling system 2.2 Gallons 8.6 Liters

Intercooler cooling system 1.1 Gallons 4.3 Liters

Engine sump and filter 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters

Automatic transmission, 2.0 T4 MAir engine 9.9 Quarts (RWD Model) / 9.8 Quarts(AWD Model)

9.4 Liters (RWD Model) / 9.3 Liters(AWD Model)

Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Differentials and reduction gears RDU230-TV – –

RDU 230-LSD differential 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) 1.4 Quarts 1.4 Liters

RDU 210/215-LSD differential 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters

AWD System FAD transfer case 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters

AWD System TRANSFER CASE 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters

245

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTSYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements ofthe Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emissionspecifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

Engine Lubrication

Use Features Specification Replacement interval

Lubricant for engines2.0 T4 MAir

SAE 0W-30API SN

MS-133409.55535–GS1 According to the Maintenance Plan

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used totop up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

Chassis Lubrication

Use Features Specification Applications

Lubricants and greases

ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission

SAE 75W-85 synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA9

DifferentialRDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD /

2.0 T4 MAir engine

SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 syntheticlubricant FPW9.55550-DA10 AWD System FAD transfer case

SAE 75W synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA11 AWD System TRANSFER CASE

Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes

Engine coolant CUNA NC 956-16ASTMD3306 MS.90032

Use rate 50% Not mixable withdifferent formulation products. (*)

Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 To be used diluted or undiluted inwindshield washer/wiper systems

HVAC R1234yf or R134yf (depending on market) – –

(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

246

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

PERFORMANCETop performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Models Maximum speed mph Acceleration from 0–60 mph/0-100 km/hsec.

2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP RWD engine 149 5.5

2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP AWD engine 149 5.1

247

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAININGSERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .249IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . .249WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . .251REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .251PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .252

248

CU

STO

ME

RA

SS

ISTA

NC

E

SUGGESTIONS FOROBTAINING SERVICEFOR YOUR VEHICLEPrepare For TheAppointment

If you are having warranty work done, besure to bring the right papers with you,as well as your warranty folder. All workto be performed may not be covered bythe warranty. Discuss additional chargeswith the service manager. Keep amaintenance log of your vehicle's servicehistory, as this can often provide a clue tothe current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle'sproblems or the specific work you wantdone. If you've had an accident or workdone that is not on your maintenancelog, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable WithRequests

If you list a number of items and youmust have your vehicle by the end ofthe day, discuss the situation with theservice advisor and list the items inorder of priority. At many authorizeddealers, you may obtain a rental vehicleat a minimal daily charge. If you need arental, it is advisable to make thesearrangements when you call for anappointment.

IF YOU NEEDASSISTANCEThe manufacturer and its authorizeddealer are vitally interested in yoursatisfaction. We want you to be happywith our products and services.Warranty service must be done by anauthorized dealer. We stronglyrecommend that you take the vehicle toan authorized dealer. They know yourvehicle the best, and are mostconcerned that you get prompt andhigh quality service. The manufacturer'sauthorized dealer have the facilities,factory-trained technicians, specialtools, and the latest information toensure the vehicle is fixed correctly andin a timely manner.This is why you should always talk to anauthorized dealer service manager first.Most matters can be resolved with thisprocess.

If for some reason you are still notsatisfied, talk to the general manager orowner of the authorized dealer. Theywant to know if you need assistance.

If an authorized dealer is unable toresolve the concern, you may contactthe manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to themanufacturer's customer center shouldinclude the following information:

Owner's name and addressOwner's telephone number (home

and office)

Authorized dealer name

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Alfa Romeo CustomerCenter

P.O. Box 21–8004Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA(1-844-253-2872)

Alfa Romeo CustomerCenter (Canada)

P.O. Box 1621Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English)Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)

249

Customer AssistanceFor The Hearing OrSpeech Impaired(TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearingdifficulties, the manufacturer has installedspecial TDD (Telecommunication Devicesfor the Deaf) equipment at its customercenter. Any hearing or speech impairedcustomer, who has access to a TDD or aconventional teletypewriter (TTY) in theUnited States, can communicate with themanufacturer by dialing1-800-380-CHRY.Canadian residents with hearingdifficulties that require assistance canuse the special needs relay serviceoffered by Bell Canada. For TTYteletypewriter users, dial 711 and forVoice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 toconnect with a Bell Relay Serviceoperator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a servicecontract for a vehicle to help protectyou from the high cost of unexpectedrepairs after the manufacturer's NewVehicle Limited Warranty expires.

The manufacturer stands behind onlythe manufacturer's service contracts. Ifyou purchased a manufacturer's servicecontract, you will receive PlanProvisions and an Owner IdentificationCard in the mail within three weeks ofthe vehicle delivery date. If you haveany questions about the servicecontract, call the manufacturer'sService Contract National CustomerHotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadianresidents, call (800) 465-2001 English /(800) 387-9983 French).The manufacturer will not stand behindany service contract that is not themanufacturer's service contract. It isnot responsible for any service contractother than the manufacturer's servicecontract. If you purchased a servicecontract that is not a manufacturer'sservice contract, and you requireservice after the manufacturer's NewVehicle Limited Warranty expires,please refer to the contract documents,and contact the person listed in thosedocuments.

We appreciate that you have made amajor investment when you purchasedthe vehicle. An authorized dealer hasalso made a major investment infacilities, tools, and training to assurethat you are absolutely delighted withthe ownership experience. You will bepleased with their sincere efforts toresolve any warranty issues or relatedconcerns.

Warning!

Engine exhaust (internal combustionengines only), some of its constituents, andcertain vehicle components contain, oremit, chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects, or other reproductive harm. Inaddition, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain, or emit, chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects, or other reproductive harm.

250

CU

STO

ME

RA

SS

ISTA

NC

E

WARRANTYINFORMATIONSee the Warranty Information Booklet,for the terms and provisions of FCA USLLC warranties applicable to thisvehicle and market.

REPORTING SAFETYDEFECTSIn The 50 United StatesAnd Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect that could cause a crash orcause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingFCA US LLC.If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, yourauthorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go tohttp://www.safercar.gov ; or writeto: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200New Jersey Avenue, SE., WestBuilding, Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov .

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle hasa safety defect, you should contactthe Customer Service Departmentimmediately. Canadian customerswho wish to report a safety defectto the Canadian government shouldcontact Transport Canada, MotorVehicle Defect Investigations andRecalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go tohttp://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ .

251

PUBLICATIONORDER FORMSTo order the following manuals, youmay use either the website or thephone numbers listed below. Visa,Mastercard, American Express, andDiscover orders are accepted.Service ManualsThese comprehensive Service Manualsprovide the information that studentsand professional technicians need indiagnosing/troubleshooting, problemsolving, maintaining, servicing, andrepairing FCA US LLC vehicles.A complete working knowledge of thevehicle, system, and/or components iswritten in straightforward language withillustrations, diagrams, and charts.Diagnostic Procedure ManualsDiagnostic Procedure Manuals are filledwith diagrams, charts and detailedillustrations. These practical manualsmake it easy for students andtechnicians to find and fix problems oncomputer-controlled vehicle systemsand features. They show exactly how tofind and correct problems the first time,using step-by-step troubleshootingand drivability procedures, provendiagnostic tests, and a complete list ofall tools and equipment.

Owner's ManualsThese Owner's Manuals have beenprepared with the assistance of serviceand engineering specialists to acquaintyou with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.Included are starting, operating,emergency and maintenanceprocedures as well as specifications,capabilities and safety tips.Call toll free at:

1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

1-800-387-1143 (Canada)OrVisit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com

252

CU

STO

ME

RA

SS

ISTA

NC

E

INDEXAccessories Purchased By The

Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Active Aerodynamics . . . . . . . . . . .59Active Safety Systems . . . . . . . . . .92Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . .152Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .152Additional Heaters. . . . . . . . . . . . .48Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Air Bag Components . . . . .110,116Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . .113Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . .110Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . .113Enhanced Accident Response . .195Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . .195Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . .112If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . .116Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . .113Maintaining Your Air BagSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Redundant Air Bag WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . .128

Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . .110,129Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .118Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .219Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19

Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) . . . . .146Alfa DNA System. . . . . . . . . . . . .144Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System. . . .92Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . .32Automatic Headlights. . . . . . . . . . .34Automatic Temperature Control

(ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .138Auxiliary Driving Systems . . . . . . . .95

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .216Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Battery Recharging . . . . . . . . . . .204Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . .95Bodywork (Cleaning And

Maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . .230Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . .203Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . .39Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Camera, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . .128Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . .170Changing A Flat Tire. . . . . . . . . . .212Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . .213Checking Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . .128Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Child Restraints

Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .121Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .119Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . .127How To Stow An Unused ALRSeat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Infants And Child Restraints . . . .120LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . .122Lower Anchors And TethersFor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . .122Older Children And ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . .122Using The Top TetherAnchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . .243Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . .42,44Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Compact Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . .224Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . .250Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb

Replacement) . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .152Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . .249

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . .34Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . .34Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .129Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240Direction Indicators

(Changing A Bulb) . . . . . . . . . .178Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . .192Door Locks

Child-Protection Door Lock —Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . .24

Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Drive Train Control (DTC) System . . .92Driving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Electric Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . .136Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . .33Electric Steering Wheel Heating . . . .32Electronic Speed Control. . . . . . . .150Electronic Speed Control

(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .150,152Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Emergency Refuelling. . . . . . . . . .191Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . .188Emergency, In Case Of . . . . . . . . .185

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . .175Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212Jump Starting . . . . . . . . .188,189Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .135Engine Coolant Level . . . . . . . .203Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . .128Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . .243Jump Starting . . . . . . . . .188,189Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . .62

Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . .201Engine Compartment (Washing) . . .231Engine Oil

Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . .191Enhanced Accident Response

Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195Environmental Protection Systems . . .58Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . .128Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . .128Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . .34,35Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .34,130External Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

FlashersHazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . .175Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .36,130

Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130Fluids And Lubricants. . . . . . . . . .246Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . .97Front Light Cluster With Main Beam

Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights(Bulb Replacement) . . . . . . . . .178

Front Mobile Spoiler(Alfa Active Aero) . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Front Seat Electric Heating . . . . . . .27Front Seats (Power Seats). . . . . . . .26Front Wipers

Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . .40Fuel

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . .244Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Fuse Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181Fuses (Replacement) . . . . . . . . . .180

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . .55Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . .243Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . .243Gauges

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

IND

EX

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62General Information . . . . . . . . .97,159Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . .54Glove Compartment Light . . . . . . . .38Glove Compartment Light

(Bulb Replacement) . . . . . . . . .179GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .175Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Headlights

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34,35Headlights (Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . .231Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . .135High Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . .35

Automatic High BeamHeadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Hill Start Assist (HSA) System . . . . .94Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . .233Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16Installing Electrical/Electronic

Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Instrument Cluster Display

Instrument Cluster Display . . . . .63

Reconfigurable InstrumentCluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Instrument Panel FeaturesInstrument Panel Features . . . . . .61

Interior Ambient Lighting . . . . . . . . .38Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Interiors (Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . .231Internal Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212Jump Starting. . . . . . . . . . . .188,189

Key FobRemote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . .14

Keyless Entry System/ImmobilizerSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Lane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . .36Lane Departure Warning System. . .164LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . .106Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Lifting The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .212Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Types Of Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . .110,129Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . .34Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . .37,38Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . .34Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . .175Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . .34,35Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .34,35High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . .34,35Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . .39Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .36,130

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .170Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Luggage Compartment Light(Bulb Replacement) . . . . . . . . .179

Luggage/Cargo Capacity . . . . . . . .52

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .252Methanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Mirrors

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . .32

Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . .33Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . .33Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

OBD System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . .104Overheating, Engine. . . . . . . . . . .191Owner's Manual

(Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .252

Paintwork (Cleaning AndMaintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System . . .94Park Sensors System. . . . . . . . . .159Passive Entry (System) . . . . . . . . . .21Performance (Top Speed) . . . . . . .247Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128Placard, Tire And Loading

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216Power

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Power Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . .109Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity . . . . . .229

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221Radio Frequency

General Information . . . . . .16,18,24Radio Transmitters And Mobile

Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Rear View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . .243Refueling Procedure. . . . . . . . . . .169Refueling The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .169Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . .105Remote Starting System . . . . . . . .132Replacement Tires. . . . . . . . . . . .223Replacing A Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . .175Replacing An External Bulb . . . . . .178Replacing An Internal Bulb. . . . . . .178Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . .251Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Rims And Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . .129Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . .130Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . .251Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . .212Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . .128Saving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172SBL Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Scheduled Servicing . . . . . . . . . .197Scheduled Servicing Program

(2.0 T4 MAir Engine Versions) . . .198Seat Belt

Energy Management Feature . . .109Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .107Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . .106Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .109Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . .109Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . .105

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .105Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105,129

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . .119Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . .105,106Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .109Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . .109Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . .107

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .30Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . .26Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .249

IND

EX

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . .252Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . .205Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . .36,130Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223,224Speed Control

Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . .151Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Speed Control(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .150,152

Speed Limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . .28Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . .133Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . .190Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . .190Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . .132Steering

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . .32Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . .239Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Stop/Start System. . . . . . . . . . . .147Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Suggestions For Driving . . . . . . . .172Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Sun Visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Supplemental Restraint System -

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . .31Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . .54Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . .31Tire And Loading Information

Placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . .212Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .130,219,223,228

Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . .222Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .219Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . .224Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . .185General Information . . . . . .219,223High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .220Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . .219Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .216Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . .228Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212,219Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .223,224Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . .222

To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . .193Towing

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .192Towing Trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . .93Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Transporting Animals . . . . . . . . . .173Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . .173Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .128Tread Wear Indicators. . . . . . . . . .222Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . .228Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . .107Use Of The Owner’s Manual . . . . . . .5

Vehicle Changes/Alterations . . . . . . .3Vehicle Identification Number . . . . .233Vehicle Loading. . . . . . . . . . .170,216Vent Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . .175Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . .251Washer Fluid For

Windshield/Headlights. . . . . . . .203Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . .39Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . .224Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . . . . .224Wheels And Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .212Windows (Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . .230Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . .129Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Replacing Blades . . . . . . . . . .208Windshield Wiper/Washer

Smart Washing Function . . . . . . .40Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .39Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

IND

EX

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTINGEQUIPMENTSpecial design considerations are incorporated into thisvehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radiofrequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephoneequipment must be installed properly by trained person-nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directlyto the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.The negative power connection should be made to bodysheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on theroof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be usedin mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets mayaffect the accuracy or operation of the compass onvehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical androuted away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Useonly fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio toensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater thannormal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-ence between the communications equipment and thevehicle’s electronic systems.

2 0 1 7

20

17

GIU

LIA

GIULIAThird Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

OW N E R ’ S M A N U A L©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark ofFCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.

17GA-126-AC

2017 Alfa Romeo Giulia Owners Manual

Automotive

Transcript of 2017 Alfa Romeo Giulia Owners Manual